JP6364888B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

The gaming machine pachinko machine or the like, and a lottery whether those Tari become based on the winning of the game balls to start winning opening, there is what is to improve player's interest in the game of Yu technique's.

JP 2003-180999 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of entertainment.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and the first position. The variable control means that can be changed to the second position where the game ball is less likely to enter, the variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable means, and the variable control based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game controlled so that the variable means is changed to the first position for at least a predetermined period by the means, and as the type of the bonus game, A first privilege game that is controlled so that the variable means variably operates in the first variable pattern, and a second privilege game that is controlled so as to variably operate in a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern. and, to determine either the type When the game ball enters the first area, the first area in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter, and when the game ball enters the first area. A second area that is advantageous to the player and a flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means travels to the first flow path or to the second area rather than the first flow path. There a sorting means for distributing to the second passage have easily proceeds as the state of the distributing means, a first state is a state in which the game ball is distributed to the first channel, the second channel a second state is a state that is distributed to be set on the basis of the establishment of the specific conditions, and distributing state switching means for switching depending on the particular switching a predetermined pattern, prior to entry in the award game The game balls that have entered the ball means are distributed to the second flow path by the distribution means. Re Suggestion effect suggests that easily, and a suggestion demonstration execution means capable of implementing before the benefits game is started, the first variable pattern, said second variable It is more difficult for the game ball to reach the sorting means while the sorting means is switched to the second state than the pattern.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the ball entry means is arranged at a position where the player can visually recognize the ball .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a game ball entering from the first position. Variable means capable of changing to a difficult second position, variable control means for controlling variable operation of the variable means, and variable for at least a predetermined period by the variable control means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is controlled so as to change the means to the first position. As the bonus game type, the variable means is a first variable. determining a first award game which is controlled so as to variably operate, and a second award game which is controlled to variably operating in the second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern, either the pattern Type determining means, and the pitching means The first area in which the game ball entered can enter, and the second area that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters compared to the case where the game ball enters the first area If, before the entry ball passages game ball travels that ball entrance to unit, the first flow path or game balls second flow path have easily progress to its said than the first flow path a second region, The distribution means that distributes to the first state, and the state of the distribution means includes a first state in which game balls are distributed to the first flow path and a second state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path. A distribution state switching means for switching the state according to a predetermined specific switching pattern that is set based on the establishment of the specific condition, and a game ball that has entered the ball entry means in the bonus game Suggests that it is easily distributed to the second flow path by the distribution means. Suggestion effect, with the suggestion effect an execution unit, which can be executed before the award game is started, the first variable pattern, than the second variable pattern, said sorting While the means is switched to the second state, it is difficult to make the game ball reach the distribution means.

Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing in the modification of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is a continuation of the sectional view in the modification of the channel of the lottery device. It is a figure which shows how to distribute the advancing direction of a game ball by the advancing direction distribution part of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the distribution rotary body of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the entrance entrance distribution part of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a back route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus swung to the right side. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a near route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus swung to the right side. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a back route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus swung to the left side. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a near route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus swung to the left side. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of the sorting rotary body of a lottery apparatus, and each entrance. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the structure position initialization process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery gate process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the rotary body position detection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the correspondence between the 1st hit type counter C2 in 2nd Embodiment, and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first per-random number counter C1 and the small hit in the special symbol in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the gate process for small hits which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 in 3rd Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the flow-path switching process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which compared the opening and closing timing of the special prize opening and the opening and closing timing of the guide passage in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the state of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment, and the effect performed. (A) is the figure which showed the variation pattern effect which becomes a big hit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the effect performed during a jackpot game. (A) is the figure which showed the chance up pattern of the fluctuation pattern effect in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the chance up pattern of the fluctuation pattern effect which becomes a big hit. (A) is the figure which showed the production | presentation performed during the jackpot game in the case of reentry into a loop state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is performed in the jackpot game which transfers to a low probability state after completion | finish. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the 2nd variable prize-winning device and the advancing direction distribution part of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the 2nd variable prize-winning device and the advancing direction of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of a distribution part. (A) is a top view of the 2nd variable prize-winning device and the advancing direction distribution part of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the 2nd variable prize-winning device and the advancing direction distribution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a part. It is a figure which shows how to distribute the advancing direction of a game ball by the advancing direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the modification of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus and the advancing direction distribution part of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows how to distribute the advancing direction of a game ball by the modification of the advancing direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a perspective view at the time of observing the entrance-portion distribution part of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment from the front right direction, (b) is the entrance-portal swing of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a perspective view at the time of observing a part from the front left direction. It is a decomposition | disassembly front perspective view of the entrance opening distribution part of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the sorting rotary body of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a near route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swung to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a back | inner route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swung to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a near route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swung to the left. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a back route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swung to the left. (A) is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a time change of a 2nd large opening | mouth and a traveling direction distribution part, when it becomes a front route jackpot in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a figure in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the time change of a 2nd large opening | mouth and a traveling direction distribution part, when it becomes a back route jackpot. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the correspondence between the 1st hit type counter C2 in 5th Embodiment, and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the jackpot type in the fifth embodiment and the state of the second large opening for each time counter value. Yes, (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the jackpot type in the fifth embodiment and the state of the traveling direction distribution unit for each time counter value. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd big opening setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the flow-path setting setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance detection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. “Big jackpot A” and “Big jackpot B” are jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of eight.

  “Big jackpot A” and “Big jackpot B” are the flow path switching valves 331a, 231a, and the like in the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery apparatus 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. 331b (see FIG. 9), there is a difference between whether the flow path through which the game balls pass is a flow path on the front side of the sorting rotator 341 (front route) or a flow path on the heel side (back route). In other words, the “big hit A” is switched to the flow path on the front side (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and the “big hit B” is switched to the flow path on the heel side (back route) (FIG. 9 (See (a)).

  Here, the “front side” and the “back side” of the sorting rotator 341 respectively indicate the front side or the back side for the player, and in the case of a flow path (front route) on the front side, a pachinko machine 10 is a flow path on the side closer to the player who is playing the game at 10 (the side far from the base plate 60). It is a flow path on the near side.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 16, but whether the flow path is on the back side or the front side (that is, the state of the flow path switching valves 331 a and 331 b) and the flow path switching. Depending on the state of the sorting rotator 341 disposed directly below the valves 331a and 331b, the short time entrance 501 and the probability variation entrance spheres 502 to 504 provided below the sort rotator 341 It is assigned to which entrance the game ball enters. When a game ball enters the short time entrance 501, the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state after the big hit and the normal symbol time is shortened for a predetermined number of times of change (for example, the number of times of change is 100 times). It becomes a state. On the other hand, when a game ball enters any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504, the game moves to a high probability state with a special symbol after the big hit.

  In the case where the flow path switching valve 331a is set to the flow path on the near side (front route), the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 are probable change winning prize ports 502, And the probability change winning award 504. Therefore, when it is set to the flow path on the near side (front route), it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the flow path is set on the back side (the dredging route), the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 are distributed by the sorting rotator 341 and the short time entrance 501 and the probable entrance entrance. Therefore, when the game is distributed to the short-time entrance 501, the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state after the jackpot and the normal symbol is used for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100). It becomes short state. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the probability variation entrance 503 by the distribution rotating body 341, the game moves to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability of the special symbol is changing (the probability of the special symbol is being changed). In other words, the game state is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, the “low probability state of a special symbol” refers to a time when the probability change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. In addition, the “short-time state (short-time)” of the normal symbol in the “low probability state of the special symbol” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It should be noted that instead of changing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or the amount of time per hit It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (a high probability state of a special symbol) with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. In the case of “big hit A” in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery apparatus 300 are switched to the front route, and in the case of “big hit B” in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery apparatus 300 are switched to the back route, Fluctuation display is performed in which main symbols to which any number from “0” to “9” is added are arranged. That is, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured such that it cannot be distinguished whether it is “big hit A” or “big hit B”. As described above, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed on the LED 37a. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the lottery device 300 with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b set to the near route, the game ball is disposed on the near side of the entrance distribution unit 340. The player enters either the probability variation entrance hole 502 or the probability variation entrance 504, and the player enters any of the entrances and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after a big hit. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the lottery device 300 with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b set to the front route, the short-time entrance port disposed at the back side of the entrance entrance distributing unit 340 501 or the probability variation entrance 503 will enter the ball, and there is a possibility that after a big hit, it shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol. Therefore, since winning the “big hit A” is more advantageous to the player than winning the “big hit B”, the player is expected to win the “big hit A”. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  A lottery device 300 is arranged in the right direction in front view with respect to the variable display unit 80 to draw whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit. The lottery apparatus 300 is provided with a lottery gate 310 that is opened based on winning the jackpot (see FIG. 5), and enters the lottery gate 310 while the lottery gate 310 is open. Based on the game balls that have been struck entering any of the probability changing entrances 502 to 504 inside the lottery apparatus 300, the game state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol after the jackpot. On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters the short-time entrance 501 inside the lottery apparatus 300, the game moves to a low probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends and for a predetermined number of fluctuations. (For example, the number of fluctuations is 100) The normal symbol is in a short time state.

  Details of the lottery apparatus 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an appearance of the lottery apparatus 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the lottery apparatus 300 includes a lottery gate 310, a flow path 320, a traveling direction distribution unit 330, a ball entrance distribution unit 340, and a ball discharge unit 350. The game ball that has entered the gate 310 is discharged to the outside of the lottery apparatus 300 through the ball discharge unit 350 through the flow path 320, the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the ball entrance distribution unit 340.

  Flow direction switching valves 331a and 331b are provided inside the advancing direction distribution unit 330, and according to the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b, the flow-down position of the game ball and the front side of the distribution rotating body 341 are arranged. You can switch to the back side. In addition, a sorting rotator 341 is swingably disposed inside the entrance allocator 340. As will be described in detail later, the sorting rotator 341 is provided with four passages (guidance passages 408a to 408d), and each passage is associated with the time-shortening entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504. It has been.

  Note that the cover portion 332, which is the outer wall portion of the traveling direction sorting portion 330, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b disposed inside the traveling direction sorting portion 330 are both transparent members (for example, PS material). It consists of Similarly, the cover part 423 which is an outer wall part of the entrance opening distributing part 340 and the assigning rotary body 341 disposed inside the entrance entrance distributing part 340 are also made of a transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the sorting rotator 341 during the game. Thereby, the player can check the game balls passing through the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the sorting rotating body 341, so that the game balls are stored in the short-time entrance ball port 501 and the probable entrance ball ports 502 to 504. It is possible to visually check which entrance to enter. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state after the jackpot. In addition, since the game ball can be visually observed as it flows down, the player is expected to enter any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 while the game ball is flowing down. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the lottery is being performed fairly by making the player see the state of the flow of the game ball until it enters one of the entrances. It is possible to suppress the distrust of the machine 10 and the hall.

  Next, the flow path 320 provided in the lottery apparatus 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the flow path 320 and the operation of the game ball that has progressed to the flow path 320. As shown in FIG. 6A, the flow path 320 includes a guide passage 321 through which a game ball entered from the lottery gate 310 passes, a guide passage 322 that guides the passed game ball to the traveling direction sorting unit 330, Close one of the ball discharge passage 323 for guiding the game ball passing to the discharge port to the outside, the guide passage 322, or the ball discharge passage 323, and advance the game ball to one of the passages. And a passage closing valve 324. The passage closing valve 324 is driven by a solenoid (not shown), and moves to the direction shown in FIG. 6A (that is, the direction in which the guide passage 322 is opened and the ball discharge passage 323 is closed) based on the winning of the big hit. And switch.

  After winning the jackpot, the game ball first entering the lottery gate 310 and flowing down the guide passage 321 reaches the passage closing valve 324 (FIG. 6A), and then the short closing valve 324b of the passage closing valve 324 is reached. To touch. Since the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate about the shaft 324c, the game ball comes into contact with the short closing valve 324b, and a load due to the weight of the gaming ball is applied to the short closing valve 324b. A force in a downward direction acts on the closing valve 324b, and the short closing valve 324b rotates until it hits the inner wall of the guide passage 322. When the short closing valve 324b rotates, the game ball advances to the guiding passage 322, and the guiding passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324a, and the ball discharging passage 323 is opened (FIG. 6B). .

  The guide passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324a and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened, so that all the game balls that subsequently enter the lottery gate 310 and flow down the guide passage 321 are ball discharge passages 323. (Fig. 6 (c)). Accordingly, the number of game balls that can travel to the guide passage 322 can be limited to one, so that the game balls that travel to the entrance distribution part 340 disposed downstream of the guide passage 322 can be reliably transmitted. It can be limited to only one ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that a plurality of game balls enter the entrance hole of the short time entrance 501 and the probability entrance entrances 502 to 504 a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate with the weight of the game ball. However, the passage of the game ball is detected using a known sensor means and guided based on the detection result of the sensor means. The opening and closing of the passages 322 and 323 may be controlled. Hereinafter, the configuration of the flow path 320 using the sensor means will be described as a modification of the flow path 320 of the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

  FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are schematic diagrams schematically showing a configuration in which the number of game balls that can be advanced to and after the traveling direction sorting unit 330 using the sensor means can be limited to one. In the flow path 320 of this modification, a sprocket 601, ball passage sensors 602a and 602b, a lever 604, and a ball passage sensor 603b are provided between the guide passage 321 and the guide passage 322, and a passage closing valve. 324 is different from the first embodiment in that the short closing valve 324b is not provided.

  When a game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 travels through the guide passage 321 and reaches the sprocket 601, the projection of the sprocket 601 prevents the game ball from proceeding. It is determined whether or not the game ball whose progress has been stopped by the sprocket is allowed to flow based on the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602a. Specifically, after the lottery gate 310 is opened, the passage of the sphere is permitted until the passage of the sphere is detected by the ball passage sensor 602a, and the sprocket 601 is rotated clockwise by the motor means, etc. The guide passage 321 can flow down.

  When the game ball flows down the one-ball guide passage 321, the ball passage sensor 602a detects the flow of the ball, and the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601 protrudes into the guide passage 321. Therefore, all the game balls that subsequently enter the lottery gate 310 and flow down the guide passage 321 are prevented from advancing by the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601.

  On the other hand, the game ball whose passage has been detected by the ball passage sensor 602a is prevented from advancing again by the lever 604 (FIG. 7A). The lever 604 operates to close or open the flow path according to the state of the ball passage sensor 602b, the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b, the passage closing valve 324, and the like.

  The lever 604 first rotates counterclockwise about the shaft 604 based on the detection of the arrival of the sphere to the upper part of the lever 604 by the ball passage sensor 602b. When the lever 604 is sufficiently rotated and does not obstruct the passage, the game ball stopped at the upper part of the lever 604 starts to flow again (FIG. 7B). The lever 604 rotates clockwise around the shaft 604a and protrudes again into the guide passage 321 based on the fact that the ball passing sensors 603a and 603b detect that the game ball has passed through the guide passage 322. This prevents the progress of other game balls. Further, based on the detection results of the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b, the passage closing valve 324 falls in the direction of the ball discharge passage 323, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened (FIG. 7C). Thereby, it can suppress that game balls other than the game ball which advanced previously to the guidance channel | path 322 progress to the guidance channel | path 322, and can discharge a game ball from the channel | path 323 for ball discharge | emission.

  While the passage closing valve 324 is tilted, the lever 604 is controlled not to operate (that is, the guide passage 322 is kept closed) regardless of the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602b. Further, the sprocket 601 rotates clockwise based on the fact that the passage closing valve 324 falls and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened, and only one game ball flows down the guide passage 321. In a state where the passage closing valve 324 is collapsed, the control is performed so that one game ball flows down each time the passage of the game ball is detected by the ball passage sensors 602a and 602b (FIG. 8 (a), FIG. 8 (b)).

  As described above, the configuration of the flow path 320 for advancing the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 to the direction of the advancing direction distribution unit 330 has been described. However, the configuration of the flow path 320 is the same as that of the present embodiment. It is not limited. As another example of the configuration, for example, instead of the passage closing valve 324 of the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent the passage of the gaming ball downstream from the shaft 324c of the passage closing valve 324 by one gaming ball. By providing a shutter and closing the shutter portion, only one game ball entering the lottery gate 310 is stopped at the shutter portion. Since there is only space for one game ball in the shutter portion, other game balls cannot be stopped at the shutter portion connected to the guide passage 322 by stopping the game ball at the shutter portion, Proceed to the ball discharge passage 324. Then, the shutter portion may be opened after a sufficient time has elapsed since the lottery gate 310 is closed, and the game ball stopped on the shutter portion may be advanced to the guide passage 322. If comprised in this way, the game ball which advances to the distribution rotary body 341 can be restrict | limited to only one ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the advancing direction distribution part 330 into which the game ball which flowed down the guidance path 322 of the flow path 320 enters is demonstrated. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the traveling direction sorting unit 330. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction distributing unit 330, the flow path 320 joined to the traveling direction distributing unit 330, and the entrance opening distributing unit 340 when viewed from the side surface direction of the game board. In both FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the base plate 60 is disposed in the right direction. As shown in FIG. 9, the advancing direction sorting unit 330 is composed of flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and a cover unit 332, and the advancing direction of the game ball is the front direction or the back direction with respect to the game board. It is distributed to either.

  The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are both electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265 and configured to be inclined in the same direction and stationary. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined in the right direction (that is, the back side for the player), the game ball is in the right direction (that is, the back side for the player). ) And flow down to the far side of the sorting rotator 341. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined in the left direction (that is, the front side for the player), the game ball is moved in the left direction (that is, for the player). The front side) and flow down to the front side of the sorting rotator 341. As described above, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined in the right direction (that is, the back side for the player), the entrance hole into which the game ball can enter is the short-time entrance 501 or the probability change The entrance 503. On the other hand, in the state where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are tilted to the left (that is, the front side for the player), the entrance hole into which the game ball can enter is the probability variation entrance ball 502 or the probability variation entrance ball. It is a mouth 504. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined leftward (that is, the front side for the player).

  The flow path solenoid 265 switches the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b to the direction corresponding to the big hit type when the lottery device 300 draws the gaming state after the big win ends, and switches the flow path after the lottery ends. The direction of the valves 331a and 331b is switched to the right (that is, the back side for the player). Also, when it is detected that the RAM erasure switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the right direction (that is, the back side for the player). That is, in a state where the lottery device 300 does not perform the lottery, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are controlled so that the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is rightward (that is, the back side for the player).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16, the entrance allocating unit 340 of the lottery apparatus 300 will be described. The entrance distribution unit 340 distributes the game balls to any of the time-short entrance 501 or the probability variation entrances 502 to 504. In this description, first, the outline of each figure will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a perspective view (FIGS. 10A and 10B), a side view (FIG. 10C) of a sorting rotator 341 that is swingably disposed in the entrance allocating unit 340, FIG. 11 is a top view (FIG. 10 (d)), and FIG. FIGS. 12 to 15 schematically show the operations of the sorting rotator 341 and the game balls when the game balls enter the time-shortening entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504, respectively. It is a schematic diagram. Further, FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the positional relationship between the sorting rotator 341, the short time entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 when the sort rotator 341 is viewed from the vertical direction. It is.

  The sorting rotator 341 includes four guide passages 408a to 408d through which game balls can pass (see FIG. 10B). Further, the sorting rotator 341 is configured to be swingable in the left-right direction about the shaft 406, and the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408a and 408b in accordance with the direction in which the derivative 341 swings. And the state in which the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408c and 408d are switched. In the initial arrangement, the state in which the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408a and 408b (that is, as shown in FIG. 10A). It is in such a state that it swings to the right side. The initial arrangement is returned by the rotation motor 264 when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on. In addition, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 341 jumps out of the entrance distribution unit 340 without entering each entrance (time-short entrance 501, and probability variation entrances 502-504). In order to suppress this, the sorting rotator 341 is surrounded on all sides by a cover portion 423.

  Although the details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, the derivative 341 swings with the weight of the ball as the game ball moves down the inclined portion 403b and reaches the ball stopper 403a and stops. Then, the state is switched to a state where the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408c and 408d (FIG. 10B). Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, the derivative 341 swings by the weight of the ball by the game ball descending the inclined portion 405b and reaching the ball stopper 405a to be stationary, so that the guide passage 408a, The state is switched to a state where the game ball can pass through 408b (FIG. 10A). When the game ball passes through the guide passages 408a and 408d, the sorting rotator 341 does not swing and the state does not change.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution rotator 341 is stationary in a state where it is tilted leftward (FIG. 11B) or rightward (FIG. 11A) inside the entrance allocator 340. In the case where the player is stationary in a state inclined to the left (FIG. 11A), the upper ends of the guide passages 408c and 408d are located directly below the entrance 411, so that the game has passed through the entrance 411. The sphere passes through the guide passage 408c or 408d. On the other hand, when the sorting rotator 341 is stationary in a state tilted to the right (FIG. 11B), the upper ends of the guide passages 408a and 408b are located directly below the entrance 411. The game ball that has passed 411 passes through the guide passage 408a or 408b.

  The game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408a enters the short time entrance 501 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 419. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408b enters the probability variation entrance port 502, and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 416. Further, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408c enters the probability variation entrance 503, and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 417. Then, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408d enters the probability variation entrance 504, and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 418. Which entrance is entered is detected by the winning sensors 420a to 420d provided in the ball discharge passages 416 to 419 at the subsequent stage of each entrance. Based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Further, the ball discharge passages 416 to 420 are configured to merge with the ball discharge passage 421 downstream. The ball discharge passage 421 is provided with a discharge ball sensor 422 for detecting a game ball to be discharged.

  Further, on the side surface side of the sorting rotator 341, a magnet 407a (a side surface on the front side of the sorting rotator 341 on the front side, FIG. 10 () a) and a magnet 407b (a side surface of the sorting rotator 341 on the back side of the front view, see FIG. 10B). In addition, a magnet 424a and a magnet 424b are provided on the inner wall portion of the cover portion 423 of the entrance distribution portion 340. These magnets 424a and 424b are provided at positions that overlap with the magnets 407a and 407b, respectively, in a state where the sorting rotating body 341 is not swung to the right or left (upright state).

  Here, the magnet 407a and the magnet 424a are installed in directions that repel each other when the sorting rotator 341 swings and rotates to a position where it stands upright. Similarly, the magnet 407b and the magnet 424b are installed so as to repel each other. Therefore, even if the sorting rotator 341 slightly swings about the shaft 406 due to vibration applied to the sorting rotator 341, the magnets 407a and 407b provided on the side surface portion of the sorting rotator 341, Since the magnets 424a and 424b provided on the inner wall portion of the entrance distribution portion 340 repel each other, it is possible to prevent the sorting rotating body 341 from rotating over the magnets 424a and 424b. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state of the sorting rotator 341 from being switched even though the game ball does not pass through the guide passage 408b or 408c.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15, the operation of the sorting rotator 341 and the game balls when the game balls pass through the passages of the sorting rotator 341 will be described. First, referring to FIG. 12, when the game ball has traveled to the guide passage 408a (that is, the travel direction distributing unit 330 distributes the travel direction of the game ball to the back, and the distribution rotating body 341 tilts to the right. Will be described.

  The game ball that has traveled to the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12A) flows down along the floor 401 along the floor 401 (FIG. 12B) and falls from the lower end of the sorting rotator 341. Then, the ball enters the short time entrance 501 and passes through the ball discharge passage 419. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and enters the short time state of the normal symbol for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100). . Since the flow path passing through the guide passage 408a simply flows down along the floor 401, a force that swings the sorting rotator 341 works when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a. In other words, the sorting rotator 341 continues to maintain the state of swinging to the right side (that is, the state where the guide passages 408a and 408b are located directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, the game ball that passes next through the entrance 411 passes through either one of the guide passages 408a and 408b. A partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the sorting rotator 341 (see FIG. 11). The partition plate 412 prevents the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 408a from entering the probable entrance ball entrance 502 on the near side without entering the short entrance entrance 501 at the back side.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13, when the game ball travels to the guide passage 408b (that is, the traveling direction sorting unit 330 sorts the traveling direction of the game ball forward, and the sorting rotator 341 moves to the right. Will be described.

  When the game ball enters the guide passage 408b, the game ball first reaches the ball stopper 403a via the floor 401 and the inclined portion 403b. Since the ball stopper 403a extends in a direction perpendicular to the floor 401 (that is, a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the game ball), the game ball is prevented from traveling and is in contact with the ball stopper 403a. (Fig. 13 (a)). When the game ball stops at the ball stopper 403a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 403a, and a force that pushes the ball stopper 403a downward acts.

  When the ball stopper 403a is pushed down, the sorting rotator 341 rotates about the shaft 406 and assumes the direction of FIG. In the direction shown in FIG. 13B, the ball stopper 403a is inclined in the lower right direction in FIG. 13B, so that the game ball flows down along the inclined portion 413 and enters the probability variation entrance port 502. The ball enters and passes through the ball discharge passage 416. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit. Note that the sorting rotator 341 continues to maintain a state in which the game ball swings to the left as shown in FIG. 13C (that is, a state where the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411) even after the game ball is dropped. . Therefore, the next game ball that passes through the entrance 411 passes through one of the guide passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the sorting rotator 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408b enters the probability variation entrance ball port 501 on the near side. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from entering the short entry slot 501 on the back side.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14, when the game ball travels to the derivative passage 408c (that is, the travel direction sorting unit 330 sorts the travel direction of the game ball backward, and the sort rotating body 341 moves leftward). Will be described.

  When the game ball enters the guide passage 408c, the game ball first reaches the ball stopper 405a via the floor 401 and the inclined portion 405b. Since the ball stopper 405a extends in a direction perpendicular to the floor 401 (that is, a direction perpendicular to the advancing direction of the game ball), the game ball is prevented from traveling and is in contact with the ball stopper 405a. (Fig. 14 (a)). When the game ball stops at the ball stopper 405a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 405a, and a force that pushes the ball stopper 405a downward acts.

  When the ball stopper 405a is pushed down, the sorting rotator 341 rotates about the shaft 406 and assumes the direction of FIG. 14B, the ball stopper 405a is inclined to the lower left direction in FIG. 14B, so that the game ball flows down along the inclined portion 414 and enters the probable entrance ball opening 503. Sphere and pass through the ball discharge passage 417. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit. Note that the sorting rotator 341 continues to maintain a state where the game ball swings to the right side as shown in FIG. 14C (that is, a state where the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411) even after the game ball is dropped. Therefore, the game ball that passes through the entrance 411 next passes through either one of the guide passages 408a and 408b. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the sorting rotator 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 408c enters the probability variation entrance 503 on the back side. It is suppressed that it enters into the probability variation entrance 504 of the near side without doing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, when the game ball travels to the guide path 408d (that is, the travel direction sorting unit 330 sorts the travel direction of the game ball forward, and the sort rotating body 341 moves to the left. Will be described.

  The game ball that has traveled to the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15A) flows down along the floor 401 along the front side of the passage wall 402 (FIG. 15B) and falls from the lower end of the sorting rotator 341. Then, the ball enters the probability variation entrance 504 and passes through the ball discharge passage 418. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d, the game ball shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol after the big hit. Since the flow path passing through the guide passage 408d simply flows down along the floor portion 401, a force that swings the sorting rotator 341 works when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d. In other words, the sorting rotator 341 continues to maintain a state of swinging to the left side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408c and 408d are located directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, the next game ball that passes through the entrance 411 passes through one of the guide passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the sorting rotator 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 408d enters the probability variation entrance 504 on the near side. It is suppressed that it enters into the probability variation entrance 503 on the back side without doing.

  As described above, one of the four passages provided in the sorting rotator 341 passes through one of the short-time entrance 501 and the probable entrance spheres 502 to 504 depending on which passage is passed. Is distributed to the entrance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the positional relationship between the sorting rotator 341, the time-shortening entrance 501, and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 will be described. FIG. 16A is a view showing a state in which the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right side and is stationary when viewed from the entrance 411 direction of the entrance allocator 340. FIG. ) Is a view showing a state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left and is stationary when viewed from the entrance 411 direction of the entrance allocator 340. As shown in FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B, a time-shortening entrance 501 is provided on the right back side of the sorting rotator 341, and a probable entrance entrance 502 is provided on the right front side. Therefore, when the sorting rotator 341 is swinging to the right side, there is a possibility of entering either the short time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 502. On the other hand, a probability variation ball opening 503 is disposed on the left back side of the sorting rotating body 341, and a probability variation ball opening 504 is disposed on the left front side. Therefore, when the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left, there is a possibility of entering either of the probability variation entrances 503 and 504.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 16, the lottery apparatus 300 determines whether the game ball moves to the high probability state of the special symbol or to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. The entry is specified based on the entered entrance (one of the short-time entrance 501 and the probable entrance 501 to 504). The game balls are distributed to one of the entrances according to the state of the flow path by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the direction of the distribution rotator 341 (rightward or leftward).

  The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched between the front route and the back route according to the selected jackpot type, and the direction of the sorting rotator 341 is based on the guide passages 408a to 408a provided with the game balls in the sorting rotator 341. It changes depending on which passage of 408d is passed.

  When the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a in a state in which the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly under the entrance 411), the state of the sort rotator 341 changes. The game ball enters the short time entrance 501 without being swung to the right side (that is, while being swung to the right). Therefore, even when the next jackpot is won, if the distribution rotator 341 remains in the right-handed state, and the game ball is again distributed to the guide passage 408a, the special symbol is continuously in a low probability state. There is a case.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b with the distribution rotator 341 swinging to the right side, the distribution rotator 341 rotates to the left around the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probable entrance gate 502. Therefore, when the next jackpot is won, the game ball reaches the sorting rotator 341 in a state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, the game ball will enter either the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504. In other words, when a game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, not only does it shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big jackpot at the next jackpot. It is.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c in a state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), the weight of the game ball is Based on this, the sorting rotator 341 rotates rightward about the shaft 406 and the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 503. Therefore, when the next jackpot is won, the game ball reaches the sorting rotator 341 in a state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, a game ball enters either the short-time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 502. In other words, in the next jackpot, there is a possibility of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot is ended, or a transition to a low probability state of a special symbol.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d with the sorting rotator 341 swinging to the left, the game sphere remains unchanged (that is, remains in the swinging state to the left). Enters the probable entrance 504. Accordingly, even when the next jackpot is won, the sorting rotator 341 remains in a state of swinging to the left side. Therefore, in the next lottery, either the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504 is played. A ball will enter. In other words, when a game ball passes through the guide passage 408d, not only does it shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big jackpot at the next jackpot. It is.

  As described above, if the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side, the game ball always moves to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, regardless of which of the guiding passages 408c and 408d passes through. Can recognize that the lottery result by the lottery apparatus 300 is in a high probability state of the special symbol only by confirming that the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left side. You can check the situation with confidence.

  On the other hand, when the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right, it is not determined whether or not the special symbol high-probability state is entered. Therefore, the lottery result by the lottery apparatus 300 is changed to the special symbol high-probability state. It will be confirmed while holding both the expectation for the transition and the anxiety about the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

  Therefore, the orientation of the sorting rotator 341 is confirmed, and if it swings to the left, it gives a sense of security to the player, and if it swings to the right, it gives a sense of expectation and anxiety to the player. Therefore, a game with sharpness can be performed.

  Furthermore, if the game balls are distributed to the guide path 408b or the guide path 408d, not only will the game shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. Since the game will be finalized, the player will be guaranteed three big hits that will be won in the high probability state of this jackpot, the next jackpot, and a special symbol that will move after the next jackpot. It can be recognized that the player is greatly satisfied, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (8 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 8 times (8 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. The variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 (not shown) is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 19B) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type are set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 19C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is set for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special symbol jackpot random number table C1. When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7, 107, 282” is a special symbol for the low probability. Stored in the jackpot random number table. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Stored in Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In this embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random value that is a big hit is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 19B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value) is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 19B). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Yes.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B are defined as" common normal reach "," shared super reach ", and" shared special reach ". Variation patterns for jackpot A are" special " Various types of “reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability of a jackpot of ordinary symbols is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the normal symbol jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 34), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 32). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e, hour / medium counter 203f, round number counter 203g, lottery flag 203h, release flag 203i, and rotator flag 203j.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, the big special lottery drawing of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and displays a hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls whenever the number of held balls changes. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the number of held balls (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball through the second entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time the game ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the normal value is 1 Addition is performed (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 29).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 of FIG. 30: No).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of the special symbol). If the probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change the probability of the special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability variation flag 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a game ball has entered any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 in the lottery performed by the lottery apparatus 300 based on the special symbol jackpot. Is turned on based on (S1614 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off when a game ball enters the short time entrance 501 in the lottery performed by the lottery apparatus 300 (S1620 in FIG. 35).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to. If the state is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e. If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The hour / counter counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and a specific value based on a game ball winning in the hour / short prize winning port 501 in the lottery performed by the lottery apparatus 300 performed based on the jackpot of the special symbol. (For example, 100) (see S1620 in FIG. 35). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends until the value of the hour / middle counter 203f becomes 0 (S214 in FIG. 26).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 29).

  The round number counter 203g is a counter indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the value of the round number counter 203g indicates the current number of rounds in the jackpot game. The round number counter 203g is set to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 when each round starts.

  The lottery flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not it is a timing for performing a lottery by the lottery apparatus 300, and is turned on when it is a timing for performing a lottery. On the other hand, the lottery flag 203h is turned off after various settings for starting the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 are performed. In other words, the lottery flag 203h is a flag that is turned on only after the lottery device 300 determines that it is time to perform a lottery and before actually starting the lottery.

  The release flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened. If the release flag 203i is on, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, and if it is off, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is closed. The release flag 203i is normally set to off, and is turned on after the lottery gate 310 is set to open in various settings when the lottery apparatus 300 performs lottery (S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when a lottery by the lottery device 300 is detected and the lottery gate 310 is closed, it is turned off (S1608 and S1609 in FIG. 35).

  The rotator flag 203j is a flag that indicates the direction of the sorting rotator 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300. If the position of the sorting rotator 341 is shifted before and after the power is turned on, the rotator is rotated. This is used to return the arrangement of the body 341 to the state before the power is turned off. If this rotating body flag 203j is on, it indicates that the sorting rotator 341 is swinging to the left, and if it is off, it indicates that the sorting rotator 341 is swinging to the right. The rotating body flag 203j is switched in conjunction with the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 by the position detection sensor 263, and the position detecting sensor 263 swings the sorting rotator 341 leftward (backward state). The rotating body flag is turned on when it is detected that it is present, and is turned off when it is detected that the sorting rotating body 341 is swung to the right (front-facing state).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in the lottery device 300 are driven to flow the game ball. A flow path solenoid 265 for switching the path is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115, and each entrance in the lottery device 300. A winning sensor 420 that detects the entry of a game ball, a position detection sensor 263 that detects the orientation of the sorting rotator 341 in the lottery apparatus 300, and a rotation motor 264 for correcting the orientation of the sorting rotator 341 are connected. The MPU 201 performs various processes based on signals output from various switches 208, a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, a ball input signal output from the winning sensor 420, a detection signal from the position detection sensor 263, and the like. Execute.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a special effect flag 223e. ing.

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is a table used to determine the aspect of the fluctuation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of a rough variation pattern mode such as “outgoing normal reach”, “shared normal reach”, “shared special reach”, or the like. The variation pattern table 222a is used to determine the detailed mode of the variation pattern based on the mode of the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command. The variation pattern table 222a is a rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command. A plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined for each mode.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1407 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 43). The stop type selection flag 223d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The special effect flag 223e is in a state in which the sorting rotator 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300 is swung to the left (see FIG. 11A), and can enter the game ball in the next lottery. In a state where the mouth becomes either the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504 (that is, a state in which it is determined that the next lottery device 300 will make a transition to the high probability state of the special symbol). This is a flag for causing the variation pattern effect to be performed in a special mode different from normal. The special effect flag 223e is turned on when a loop state command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S3702 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when a normal state command output from the main controller 110 is received. (See S3704 in FIG. 42).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Accordingly, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 21 shows that the display controller 114 turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. A display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 14) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 46 (b) S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 56) for transferring image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering an image of each sprite designated in the table, a corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 46B). ), The pointer update process (see FIG. 54) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 (see S3201 in FIG. 54).

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 24) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 24, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 46B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3513 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 56). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the lottery flag 203h is turned on (S212), and this process ends.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S213), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S213: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203f (S214), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, there are three random numbers “7, 107, 282” stored in the first per random number table 202a for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability. The random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a high probability is stored in the first per random number table 202a for the high probability, “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78”. , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”. .

  Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag 203e. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit in the process of S302 (S302: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 ( S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots (big hits) It is determined which of the jackpot types is A or jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot A (front route jackpot) and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the jackpot It is determined that it is B (back route jackpot) (see FIG. 19B).

  In the process of S303, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). In addition, a stop symbol common to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S304). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S304, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are specified. As a variation pattern for common hit / miss, “various common reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S302: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S304, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is completed, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern determined by the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S308 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the process of S406, prediction of whether or not the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 19A). It is determined by comparing (hit value) one by one. As described above, there are three random numbers “7, 107, 282” stored in the first per random number table 202a for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability. The random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a high probability is stored in the first per random number table 202a for the high probability, “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78”. , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”. .

  Whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S407, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203e. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  If it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, Of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B), it is determined which jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot is A (the jackpot at which the flow path in the lottery device 300 is switched to the foreground route, the foreground route jackpot). If it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot B is a jackpot B (a jackpot where the flow path in the lottery apparatus 300 is switched to the back route, a back route jackpot) (see FIG. 19B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front / rear out of reach reach as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than a back-and-forth deviation or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is selected from a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202, based on a predicted lottery result or a predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). It will be selected accordingly. In the variation pattern table, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, various types of “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, “out super reach”, “out special reach” "Variation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B are defined as" common normal reach "," shared super reach ", and" shared special reach ". Variation patterns for jackpot A are" special " Various types of “reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time-shortage counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S609). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19C).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 19C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S619). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, it is first determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S703: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S913. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. In the rotating body position initialization process in S910 (see FIG. 33), the position of the sorting rotating body 341 disposed in the lottery apparatus 300 is changed as necessary. To correct. After the end of the rotating body position initialization process (S310), the process proceeds to S911, where an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are controlled in various ways. The execution of the effect is permitted (S911). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the rotating body position initialization process (S910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the rotating body position initialization process (S910).

  As described above, the rotating body position initialization process (S910) is a process of correcting the position of the sorting rotating body 341 disposed in the lottery apparatus 300 as necessary. The case where correction is necessary is, for example, a case where the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 has changed between the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the next time the power is turned on. In addition, the arrangement | positioning which the distribution rotary body 341 can take has the arrangement | positioning (refer FIG.11 (b)) swung to the right side (front-facing state), and the arrangement | positioning (FIG. (See (a)). The right-side swinging state (front-up state) occurs when initialization is performed (that is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on) Is a case of passing through a guide passage 408c provided in the sorting rotator 341 (see FIG. 14). On the other hand, the state of swinging to the left side (backward state) is when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b provided in the sorting rotator 341 (see FIG. 13).

  In the rotating body position initialization process (S910), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1501). (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to S1502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, it is off), it is further determined whether or not the rotator flag 203j is on (S1503). If it is determined that it is not (that is, it is OFF), the process proceeds to S1502.

  In the process of S1502, the rotation motor 264 for rotating the sorting rotator 341 is driven, and the arrangement is such that the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right side (front-facing state) (see FIG. 11B). (S1504), the process is terminated and the process returns to the start-up process.

  In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1503: Yes), the state of the sorting rotating body 341 before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is swung to the left (backward) In this state, the rotation motor 264 for rotating the sorting rotator 341 is driven to swing the sorting rotator 341 to the left side (backward state). (See FIG. 11A), the process is terminated and the process returns to the startup process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1009 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1012 and S1013 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-control device (peripheral External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command and the winning information command set in the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened or closed. A lottery gate process is executed (S1004). In the lottery gate process (S1004), after the jackpot stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated (that is, whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state) At the timing performed by the lottery apparatus 300, the lottery gate 310 is opened. Further, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate, or when it is detected that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed, the lottery gate 310 is closed. Furthermore, in this process, it is detected whether the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 has entered the short-time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrances 502 to 504. Processing is performed according to the entrance of the entrance. In the present embodiment, the lottery gate process (S1004) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  After the lottery gate processing (S1004) is finished, when the special symbol jackpot state is reached, the jackpot control is executed to open or close the special winning opening (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or execution of the jackpot effect. Processing is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a rotating body position detection process is performed in which the arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300 is determined based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263 (S1006). In the present embodiment, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  When the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is finished, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1007). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1008). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S304 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S306, the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S306 ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S303 or the processing of S305 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1009). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) or the process of S621, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 29), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S613 or S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1011). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1011: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1011: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main process execution timing is reached. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1012 and S1013).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1012). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1010, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1 As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1014 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1014), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1015). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1016), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1017), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1010 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1009, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1012 and S1013 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the lottery gate process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the lottery gate processing (S1004). This lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and controls the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 for lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. This is a process for detecting the entrance of the game ball that entered the lottery gate 310.

  In the lottery gate process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery flag 203h is on. If it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is on (S1601: Yes), the lottery device 300 performs the lottery because it indicates the timing for starting the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. For this purpose, various settings are made (S1602 to S1604), the lottery flag 203h is turned off (S1605), and this process ends.

  In various settings for performing lottery by the lottery apparatus 300, first, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the jackpot type (S1602). Specifically, if the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to the front route, and if the jackpot type is “big hit B”, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to the back. Set to root. When the process of S1602 is completed, the lottery gate 310 is set to be opened, so that the game ball can enter the lottery apparatus 300 (S1603). Thereafter, the release flag 203i is turned on to indicate that the lottery gate 310 is opened (S1604), and various settings are ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S1601 that the lottery flag 203h is not on (that is, is off) (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203i is on, and the release flag 203i is set. If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the process of S1607 to S1612 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release flag 203i is on (S1606: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 has been opened, so it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the lottery gate 310. (S1607).

  In the process of S1607, when it is determined that a game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: Yes), a game ball necessary for performing the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 has entered the lottery apparatus 300. In order to prevent game balls from entering the lottery apparatus 300 thereafter, the lottery gate 310 is closed (S1608), the release flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613. .

  In the process of S1607, when it is determined that no game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S1610). Here, a condition for closing the lottery gate 310 in a state where no game ball enters the lottery gate 310 is that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed. When it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (that is, within the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310) (S1610: No), the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (that is, the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310 has passed) (S1610: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned off and the time-shortage counter 203f is set. 100 is set (S1611), and the time and college hit game is set (S1612). Then, the lottery gate is closed (S1608), the release flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613.

  In the process of S1613, based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the probability changing entrances 502 to 504 (S1613). If it is determined that the ball has entered any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 (S1613: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on (S1614), and the start of the probability variation big hit game is set (S1615). Then, it is determined whether or not the entrance into which the game ball has entered is the probability variation entrance 503 (S1616). If it is determined that the entrance is the probability variation entrance 503 (S1616: Yes), the sound lamp control is performed. A normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the device 113 (S1618), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1616 that the entrance into which the game ball has entered is not the probability variation entrance 503 (that is, the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504) (S1616: No), a loop state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1617), and this process is terminated.

  Here, the normal state command and the loop state command will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the probability variation entrance 503, the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right based on the game ball passing through the guide passage 408c. (See FIG. 14). When the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right side, in the next lottery performed by the lottery apparatus 300, the game ball is a short-time entrance slot 501 that is a entrance slot arranged on the right side of the lottery apparatus 300, or a probability change entrance. Since the ball enters any of the ball outlets 502 (see FIG. 16A), the game ball does not necessarily shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot is ended, and the game ball enters the short time. When entering the mouth 501, the state shifts to a special symbol low probability state.

  On the other hand, when a game ball enters the probability variation entrance port 502 or the probability variation entrance port 504, the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left (see FIGS. 13 and 15). In the next lottery at the next jackpot, the entrance into which game balls are distributed is the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504 which is the entrance arranged on the left side of the lottery apparatus 300. (Refer to FIG. 16 (b)), even after the next jackpot, the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the probability variation entrance port 502 or the probability variation entrance 504 than to enter the probability variation entrance 503.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probability variation ball entrance 502 or the probability variation ball entrance 504 (S1616: No), the voice lamp control device 113 is in a loop state that is advantageous to the player. It is configured to transmit a command (loop status command) indicating that it has shifted to (1). Then, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, the sound lamp control device 113 displays based on the reception of the loop state command that suggests that the current state is advantageous to the player. An effect (loop state effect) can be executed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous by generating a loop state effect that is different from the normal effect, so that the loop state that is advantageous for the player Despite being in the middle, it is possible to suppress quitting the game without noticing an advantageous state.

  On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probability variation entrance 503 (S1616: Yes), the normal state indicating that the current state is not the loop state (that is, the normal state) to the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to send commands. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not to execute the loop state effect based on which of the normal state command and the loop state command is received.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1613, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 (S1613: No), whether or not the game ball has entered the short time entrance 501 or not. Is determined based on the detection result of the winning sensor 420c (S1619), and when it is determined that the player has not entered the time-shortening entrance 501 (S1619: No), the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1619, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the short time entrance 501, the game shifts to a special symbol low probability state after a big hit, so the probability variation flag 203e is turned off and the short time counter 203f Is set to 100 (S1620), and the start of the time and college hit game is set (S1621). Then, a normal state command for notifying that the current state is not in a loop state (that is, a normal state) is set as a command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1622), and this process ends.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S1612, S1615, or S1621 of the lottery gate process (see FIG. 35) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. To do. If the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 (S1102), and this processing is terminated. This round number counter 203g determines the number of rounds in the big hit.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the round number command is set, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to make the round number of the newly started round coincide with the value of the round number counter 203g (S1107), and this process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1104 (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1109), and the round counter 203g It is determined whether or not the value is 8 (S1110). In the process of S1110, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 8 (that is, any one of 1 to 7) (S1110: No), this process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), since the current timing is the end timing of 8 rounds (that is, the final round), the jackpot end is set (S1111), End the process and return to the main process.

  Next, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the rotating body position detection process (S1006). This rotating body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), the arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is stored in the rotating body flag 203j, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. This is also a process for enabling the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 to be returned to the same arrangement as that immediately before the power is turned off at the time of power recovery.

  In this rotating body position detection process (S1006), it is first determined whether or not the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501). If it is determined as a result of the processing in S2501 that the rotator flag 203j is not on (that is, is off) (S2501: No), in the previous rotator position detection process, the arrangement of the sorting rotators 341 is face-up ( In other words, based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, whether or not the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 is in a front-facing state (a state that has swung to the right). Thus, it is determined whether or not the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 has changed between the previous rotator position detection process and the current rotator position detection process (S2502).

  Then, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 is in the face-up state (the state that it is swung to the right) (S2502: Yes), the placement rotator 341 is placed at the time of the previous rotator position detection process. Therefore, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 is in a face-down state (a state that has been swung to the left side) (S2502: No), Since it indicates that the arrangement has changed, the rotator flag 203j is turned on (S2503), and this process ends.

  In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501: Yes), the current arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is face-up (on the right side) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263. Is determined (S2504), and when it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 is facing down (swinged to the left) (S2504: No), the sorting is performed. Since the arrangement of the rotator 341 has not changed from the time of the previous rotator position detection process, this process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 is a front-facing state (a state that it is swung to the right) (S2504: Yes), the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 from the time of the previous rotating body position detection process. Is changed, the rotating body flag 203j is turned off (S2505), and this process ends.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 38, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-up processing in S1316 is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 39). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1313 in FIG. 39), it executes a power-off process in S1316. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1316 is in the middle of execution can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1316 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1316, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1316, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1316 is executed (see S1315 in FIG. 39). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1316 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1316 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311 and the variation display setting process of S1312 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the command determination process (S1311) is completed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1312 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1313 (S1313: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1316). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S1313 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed (S1402), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). In the process of S1407, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1407 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1407. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1406, if no pending ball number command has been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). If a winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1409). When the processing of S1409 is completed, the winning information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1409 is used as the first free area (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1410) and return to the main process.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1408 (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1413), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command is not received in the process of S1411 (S1413: No), then a special effect setting process for determining whether or not the current state is a loop state is executed (S1414). . Based on the determination result by the special effect execution process, it is determined whether or not to perform a special effect that suggests a loop state that is advantageous to the player.

  When the process of S1414 ends, it is then determined whether another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received result is executed (S1419), and the process ends. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1402) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1402). This variation pattern selection process (S1402) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1402 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the main control device 110. Is a process for selecting the type of variation pattern to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern command from.

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is turned on (S2702).

  If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on, the variation pattern type for the loop state is extracted from the variation pattern types based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (S2703). This process is terminated. In the process of S2703, in addition to the variation pattern type that is selected even in the normal state, a variation pattern type that is not selected in the normal state can be selected. Therefore, a variation pattern effect in a mode dedicated to the loop state different from the normal state is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby suggesting that the player is in a special state. . The loop state-only mode is, for example, a character that does not appear in the normal state during the variation of the third symbol, a symbol that is different from the normal state, a sound effect that is different from the normal state, etc. For example, voice production is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S2702: No), the normal state among the variation pattern types based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The fluctuation pattern type for use is extracted (S2704), and this process is terminated. Based on the variation pattern type extracted by the processing of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is the loop state based on the state of the special effect flag 203e. A variation pattern effect mode for suggesting that the present is in an advantageous state can be selected. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present state is advantageous by executing the variation pattern effect in a different manner from the normal state, so that the loop state which is advantageous for the player Despite being in the middle, it is possible to suppress quitting the game without noticing an advantageous state.

  Note that the configuration may be such that the variation pattern type selected during the normal state is not selected at all during the loop state. Thereby, the player can determine whether or not the current state is in the loop state by performing the variation pattern effect only once, so that the player is in the loop state despite being in the loop state. It is possible to more reliably prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special effect setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1414). This special effect setting process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 40). This is a process for determining whether or not the current state is a loop state and causing the variation pattern effect to be executed in an effect manner according to whether or not the current state is the loop state.

  In the special effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a loop state command is received (S3701). The loop state command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the probability variation entrance port 502 or the probability variation entrance port 504 in the above-described lottery gate process (see FIG. 35). This is a command that is output, and is a command that indicates a transition to a loop state that shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol not only after the current jackpot but also after the next jackpot.

  If it is determined that the loop state command has been received (S3701: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on to indicate that the current state is the loop state (S3702), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a loop state command has not been received (S3701: No), it is then determined whether a normal state command has been received (S3703). The normal state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the short time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 503 in the above-described lottery gate process (see FIG. 35). It is a command that is output, and it is a command that indicates the transition to the normal state where there is a possibility of transitioning to either the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot .

  If it is determined that the normal state command has been received (S3703: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned off to indicate that the current state is not in a loop state (S3704), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the normal state command has not been received (S3703: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), the state of the special effect flag 223e set in this process is determined, and the variation pattern is executed in a special manner for the loop state, or for the normal state. Whether to execute the variation pattern in a manner is determined. Thereby, during the loop state, the variation pattern effect is executed in a mode different from the normal state, so that the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quitting the game without noticing that the current state is in the loop state but not being in the loop state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the process of S2703 or S2704 in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the display stop for notifying the display control device 114 based on the set stop type. A type command is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S1710), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 46B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. In the case of being via the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes time to transfer the data, and the time that the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 24) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of various jackpots, front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401). The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared between the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. A stop symbol after production is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment as in the present embodiment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2206 that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a display round number command (S2208: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2208 that there is no display round number command (S2208: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is an image change command (S2210: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2211) will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . Then, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S2104), if it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 From this, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM address of the normal video RAM 236 corresponding to the back image is specified. To do.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2210 that there is no rear image change command (S2210: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2212). If (S2212: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2219 is executed again. The processing of S2201 to S2219 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 48) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 49), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed. The processing corresponding to is performed without executing the processing corresponding to.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48) executed in this case, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301, Further, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. In the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the contents are cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing (S2104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. To return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing for performing the confirmed display, so the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task processing (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 21B and 21C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 displays image data of frequently displayed images such as the third symbol, character symbol, and error message, and is displayed by the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, the display controller 114, and the like. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the determination is made, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the third operation is performed from various operations performed at arbitrary timing by the player. Responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, The image data used in the image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3601). In other words, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, after the special symbol jackpot is determined and the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is confirmed and displayed, the lottery device 300 performs a special after the jackpot. A lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to a high probability state of the symbol. In this lottery, a game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 is one of a plurality of entrances (hour short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504) provided in the lottery device 300. Whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is determined based on whether or not the ball is entered. In addition, the lottery device 300 is provided with flow path switching valves 331a and 331b for controlling the advancing direction of the game balls that have entered the lottery device 300, and a sorting rotator 341, and a game according to these states. The entrance to enter the ball is determined.

  The states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are determined according to the jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). When the big hit type is the big hit A, the game ball flows down to the front side of the sorting rotator 341. The direction is switched (see FIG. 9B). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, the game ball is switched to the direction of flowing down to the rear side of the sorting rotator 341 (see FIG. 9A). Further, the state of the sorting rotator 341 is switched according to which of the four guide passages 408a to 408d provided in the sorting rotator 341 passes the game ball.

  Specifically, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a in a state in which the sort rotating body 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state in which the guide paths 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411), the sort rotating body The game ball enters the short time entrance 501 without changing the state of 341 (that is, with the state swaying to the right). Therefore, even when the next jackpot is won, if the distribution rotator 341 remains in the right-handed state, and the game ball is again distributed to the guide passage 408a, the special symbol is continuously in a low probability state. There is a case.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b with the distribution rotator 341 swinging to the right side, the distribution rotator 341 rotates to the left around the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probable entrance gate 502. Therefore, when the next jackpot is won, the game ball reaches the sorting rotator 341 in a state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the player enters either the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504. In other words, when a game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, not only does it shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big jackpot at the next jackpot. It is.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c in a state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), the weight of the game ball is Based on this, the sorting rotator 341 rotates rightward about the shaft 406 and the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 503. Therefore, when the next jackpot is won, the game ball reaches the sorting rotator 341 in a state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state where the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the player enters either the short time entrance 501 or the probability entrance entrance 502. In other words, after the big jackpot, it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, but at the next big jackpot, the possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big jackpot ends will also move to the low probability state of the special symbol There is also a possibility of transition.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d with the sorting rotator 341 swinging to the left, the game sphere remains unchanged (that is, remains in the swinging state to the left). Enters the probable entrance 504. Therefore, even when the next jackpot is won, the sorting rotating body 341 remains in a state of swinging to the left side, so that the next time, either the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504 is entered. It becomes. In other words, when a game ball passes through the guide passage 408d, not only does it shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big jackpot at the next jackpot. It is.

  As described above, if the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side, the game ball always moves to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, regardless of which of the guiding passages 408c and 408d passes through. Can recognize that the lottery result by the lottery apparatus 300 is in a high probability state of the special symbol only by confirming that the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left side. You can check the situation with confidence.

  On the other hand, when the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right, it is not determined whether or not the special symbol high-probability state is entered. Therefore, the lottery result by the lottery apparatus 300 is changed to the special symbol high-probability state. It will be confirmed while holding both the expectation for the transition and the anxiety about the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

  Therefore, the orientation of the sorting rotator 341 is confirmed, and if it swings to the left, it gives a sense of security to the player, and if it swings to the right, it gives a sense of expectation and anxiety to the player. Therefore, a game with sharpness can be performed.

  Furthermore, if the game balls are distributed to the guide path 408b or the guide path 408d, not only will the game shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. Since the game will be finalized, the player is guaranteed three big hits that will be won in a high probability state with a special symbol that will move after the next jackpot, the next jackpot, and the next jackpot. Can be recognized, a great satisfaction can be given to the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side, it shifts to a special symbol high probability state after the next big hit. That is, since the winning is continuously performed in the high probability state of the special symbol, it becomes a very advantageous state for the player. And in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to suggest to a player that it is an advantageous state, it is comprised so that the variation pattern effect of the aspect different from usual can be selected. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present state is advantageous by executing the variation pattern effect in a different manner from the normal state, so that the loop state which is advantageous for the player Despite being in the middle, it is possible to suppress quitting the game without noticing an advantageous state.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 is arranged in the right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display unit 80. However, the lottery device 300 is not limited to this position, and game balls can enter the lottery gate 310. As long as it is an arbitrary position, it may be arranged at an arbitrary position. Further, the lottery gate 310 is constituted by a lid-like gate as shown in FIG. 6, but instead of this, a shutter-like gate that opens and closes vertically may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 341 is configured to be switched to a state of swinging to the right side or to a state of swinging to the left side according to the guide path through which the game ball has passed, and the probability variation ball opening 502 is configured. In the next lottery after the game ball has entered, the probability variation ball entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance ball entrance 504 can be entered only in a continuous state, so that a high probability state of a special symbol continues. Although it is configured to win two or more times, it may be realized in a controlled manner.

  For example, the first hit type selection table 202b is won for the first hit type selection per first selection type 202b1 for the first hit (when the big win is won in the low probability state of the special symbol) and the high probability state of the special symbol is won. The first loop type selection table 202b2 for cases may be provided. In this case, the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit is shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol, and in the next lottery, the big hit and the special symbol of the loop state first hit type selection table 202b2 are used. On the other hand, in the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but the next lottery is the first hit. Define the jackpots for which the first hit type selection table 202b1 is used and the jackpots for which the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol and the loop state first hit type selection table 202b2 is used for the next lottery That's fine.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery by the lottery device 300 is executed before the jackpot game is started. However, the lottery by the lottery device 300 may be executed during the jackpot game. For example, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 may be opened in the first round.

  In this case, it may be configured such that a prize ball is awarded to the player every time one game ball is detected by the discharged ball detection sensor 422 of the lottery apparatus 300. Then, in the round in which the lottery is executed, the lottery gate 310 is opened until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won, in the same manner as the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in other rounds. You may comprise so that it may be carried out. That is, in the lottery round, the lottery apparatus 300 also serves as the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. By performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 during the jackpot game, it is possible for the player to suppress the jackpot game from being simply a work for obtaining a game, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is improved. be able to.

  Moreover, when it is set as the structure which performs the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 during a jackpot game, you may comprise so that the specific winning opening (large opening | mouth opening) 65a may be closed in the round in which a lottery is performed. That is, you may comprise so that the lottery apparatus 300 may have the role of a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. In this case, the lottery apparatus 300 is defined as the first specific prize opening, the specific prize opening (large opening mouth) 65a is defined as the second specific prize opening, and the first specific prize opening and the second specific prize opening are determined according to the jackpot type. It may be configured to change the opening pattern. And you may comprise so that the setting of a flow path may also be switched for every round.

  For example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the front route in the first round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the back route in the second round. If the jackpot type is a jackpot A, only the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened in one round, and only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is opened in the second to eighth rounds. Set as follows. Since the first specific winning opening (the lottery gate 310) is opened only in the first round for which the foreground route is set, the game balls always travel the foreground route in the lottery performed by the lottery device 300.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is set to be opened in 1 round and 3 to 8 rounds, and the first specific winning opening (lottery) is set in 2 rounds. Only the gate 310) is opened. Since the first specific winning opening (the lottery gate 310) is opened only in the second round for which the back route is set, the game balls always travel on the back route in the lottery performed by the lottery device 300.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, only two types of jackpot A and jackpot B are provided as jackpot types of special symbols, and the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to jackpot A and jackpot B, jackpot C and jackpot D that are 2R jackpots, and jackpot A and jackpot that are round jackpots of 2 rounds. B is provided.

  Small hit A and small hit B are those whose status does not change after each small hit, and if any special hit is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol low even after the small hit ends If the probability state is maintained and conversely, if any of the small wins is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. In addition, if any of the small wins is won in the short time state, the game is started from the continuation of the short time state even after the end of the small hits.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened before the start of the small hit even when winning a small hit. This is exactly the same as when winning the jackpots AD. The difference between the small hit and the big win is that the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 is discharged from the ball discharge passage 323 without proceeding to the advancing direction sorting unit 330 and the subsequent steps. That is, the player cannot recognize whether the winning game is a big hit or a small hit until it can be determined whether or not the game ball advances to and after the traveling direction sorting unit 330.

  Therefore, when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the player first expects that the game ball will advance to the advancing direction sorting unit 330 and thereafter (that is, the current hit is one of the big hits). In the case where the game ball has progressed to the advancing direction distribution unit 330 or later, it is expected that the game ball will enter any of the probability change entrance holes 502 to 504. Further, after the start of the jackpot game, The game will be played with the expectation that it will be a big hit of 8 rounds. Therefore, a player's expectation can be regularly raised, and the player's interest in games can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the ROM 202 are partially changed in the main controller 110. The small hit type selection table 202e is added, and the small hit flag 203k is provided in the RAM 203. Also, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 34) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of this embodiment is provided with a small hit flag 203k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The small hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is the opening timing of the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 when winning a small hit, and is turned on when it is the timing to open the lottery gate 310. The On the other hand, the small hit flag 203k is turned off after the lottery gate 310 is set to open.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 shows the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a small hit type selection table 202e is provided (FIGS. 59A and 59C). Further, in the first hit type selection table 202b, in addition to “big hit A” and “big hit B”, tables of “big hit C” and “big hit D” are added, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. 10 and different.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 39” is “big hit A”. . The jackpot type when the random number value is “50 to 89” is “jackpot B”. Furthermore, the jackpot type when the random value is “40 to 49” is “big jackpot C”, and the jackpot type when the random value is “90 to 99” is “jackpot D”. Note that the “big hit C” and “big hit D” added in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment are both big hits with a maximum number of rounds of two.

  “Big jackpot C” and “Big jackpot D” are the flow path switching valves 331a, 231a, and the like in the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery apparatus 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. There is a difference in whether the flow path through which the game balls pass by 331b (see FIG. 9) is the flow path on the front side of the sorting rotator 341 (front route) or the flow path on the heel side (back route). In other words, “big hit C” is switched to the flow path on the near side (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and “big hit D” is switched to the flow path on the heel side (back route) (FIG. 9). (See (a)).

  The “hit C” and “hit D” have a smaller number of rounds than the “hit A” and “hit B” (that is, the number of winning balls that the player can acquire) is smaller. If the game ball enters and the game ball enters one of the entrances, and the jackpot game starts, the player can expect to pay more prize balls. Is expected to be a big hit ("big hit A" or "big hit B"). Therefore, when the player wins 8 rounds as expected by the player, greater satisfaction can be given.

  The small hit type selection table 202e defines the random number value of the first hit random number counter C1 when winning a small hit for each small hit type (FIG. 59 (c)). In the first hit random number counter C1, the small hit type when the random number value is “15 to 24” is “small hit A”. Further, the small hit type when the random number value is “141 to 150” is “small hit B”.

  As described above, “small hit A” and “small hit B” are those whose status does not change after the end of each small hit, and if one of the small hits is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, The low probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the hit is ended, and conversely, if one of the small wins is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. . In addition, if any of the small wins is won in the short time state, the game is started from the continuation of the short time state even after the end of the small hits.

  In addition, “small hit A” and “small hit B” are those when the lottery gate 310 is opened by the lottery apparatus 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the small hit is confirmed (to enter the high probability state). Whether or not the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (see FIG. 9) is set to the front side flow path (front side route) when performing a fake operation that does not actually perform the lottery while pretending that the transfer lottery is performed. There is a difference in whether it is a channel on the heel side (back route). That is, in “small hit A”, the flow is switched to the flow path on the front side (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and in “small hit B”, the flow is switched to the flow path on the heel side (back route) ( FIG. 9 (a)).

  Actually, even if each small winning unit is won, the game ball does not travel to the advancing direction distributing unit 330 where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are disposed, so the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b Even if it is switched, there is no direct effect on the game, but by switching the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b as in the case of winning various types of jackpots, It makes it difficult for the player to discern whether there is any, and the expectation for winning the jackpot can be maintained for a longer time.

<Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  Among the special symbol variation processing (S104), in each processing of S201 to S211, and S213 and S214, each processing of S201 to S211 and S213 and S214 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing is executed. In the special symbol variation process in the second embodiment, when it is determined in S211 that the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is not a big hit of the special symbol. (S211: No), next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special symbol small hit (S221). If it is determined that the special symbol is not a small hit (S221: No), the process proceeds to S213. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit (S221: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is turned on (S222), and the process is terminated.

  By turning on the small hit flag 203k, in the small hit gate processing (S1021), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened before the small hit is started, and the special symbol It is possible to make it appear as if a lottery to shift to a high probability state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to delay the timing at which the player can recognize whether the winning is a small hit or a big win, so the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability state of the special symbol can be kept longer. Can be added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a main process of main controller 110.

  Among the main processes of the main controller 110, in the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 34) of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S1017 are executed. And in the main process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1004 is completed, the small hit gate process (S1021) is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, in the small hitting gate process (S1021), when the small hitting is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened, and the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. It is a process for making it operate | move as if it is drawn or not.

When the small hitting gate process ends, next, the big hit control process 2 (S1022) is executed instead of the big hit control process (FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. The jackpot control process 2 is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, similarly to the jackpot control process (FIG. 36).
Further, when the big hit control process 2 (S1022) ends, the small hit control process (S1023) is executed. This small hitting control process (S1023) is a process for performing various effects according to the small hitting and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When the small hit control process (S1023) ends, the process proceeds to S1006.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the small hitting gate process (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control measure 110 will be described. As described above, in the small hitting gate process (S1021), when the small hitting is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Is a process for operating as if.

  In the small hitting gate process (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not the small hitting flag 203k is on (S3801). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S3801: Yes), a setting for performing a lottery transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is performed based on the fact that the small win is won. Specifically, first, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the route determined according to the small hit type (S3802), and the lottery gate 310 is set to be opened (S3803). Next, the release flag 203i is turned on (S3804), the small hit flag is turned off (S3805), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is not on (that is, is off) (S3801: No), it is then determined whether or not the release flag 203i is on (S3806), and the release flag 203i is set. If it is on (S3806: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, so it is determined whether or not a ball entering the lottery gate 310 has been detected (S3807).

When it is detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3807: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed so that no additional game ball enters the lottery gate 310 (S3808). The release flag 203i is turned off, and the process proceeds to S3812.
On the other hand, when it is not detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3810: No), it is determined whether or not a closing condition for the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S3810). The closing condition of the lottery gate 310 other than that a game ball enters is that a maximum opening period (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed.

  As a result of the process of S3810, when it is determined that the lottery gate 310 closing condition is satisfied (S3810: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S3811), and the lottery gate 310 is closed ( (S3808), the release flag 203i is turned off (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (S3810: No), the process of S3808, S3809, S3811 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3812. If it is determined in the process of S3806 that the release flag 203i is not on (that is, it is off) (S3806: No), the process of S3807 to S3809 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3812.

  In the process of S3812, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323 (S3812), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323, the small hit game is started. After setting (S3813), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the ball discharge passage 323, the present process is ended as it is.

  When the start of the small hit game is set at the timing when the ball entering the lottery gate 310 is detected, the small hit game starts without determining whether or not the game ball reaches the traveling direction distribution unit 330, There is a possibility that the player will recognize that the current hit is a small hit without causing the player to have a sense of expectation that the game ball will travel to the traveling direction sorting unit 330, and the interest may be offended. On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if it is a small hit, the small hit game is not started until it is determined that the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 has passed through the ball discharge passage 323. By delaying the timing at which it is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot or a jackpot, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the jackpot longer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1022).

  Of the jackpot control process 2, the processes of S1101 to S1111 execute the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1111 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. In the jackpot control process 2 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1109 is completed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot A or jackpot B (S1121), and the jackpot A or jackpot B is determined. If it is determined (S1121: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot is neither jackpot A nor jackpot B (that is, jackpot C or jackpot D) (S1121: No), then whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 or not (That is, whether or not it is the second round) (S1122), and when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 2 (that is, the second round) (S1122: Yes), the number of rounds Means the end timing of jackpot C or jackpot D, which is a jackpot of two rounds, so the process shifts to the processing of S1111 to set the end of jackpot (S1111), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S1122: No), since the second round jackpot game remains, this process is terminated as it is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, jackpot types with different numbers of rounds are provided, but by performing the processing of S1121 and S1122 of this jackpot control processing 2 (S1022), the jackpot game with the number of rounds according to the jackpot type Can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the small hitting control process (S1023) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process (S1023). As described above, the small hit control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hit and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the small hit control process (S1023), it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit A or the small hit B (S3901). Note that the start of a small hit is set in the process of S3811 or S3813 of the small hit gate process (see FIG. 62).

  As a result of the process of S3901, when it is determined that the start timing of the small hit A or the small hit B is (S3901: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the start timing of the small hit A nor the start timing of the small hit B is (S3901: No), it is then determined whether or not the present is in the small hit game (S3903).

  If it is determined that the current game is not a small hit game (S3903: No), the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game is a small hit game (S3903), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S3904). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S3904), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S3905), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S3905). S3906). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After setting the round number command, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to make the round number of the newly started round coincide with the value of the round number counter 203g (S3907), and this process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of S3904 (S3904: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S3908, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S3908: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S3909), and the round counter 203g It is determined whether or not the value is 2 (S3910). In the process of S3910, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S3910: No), this process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S3910: Yes), since the current timing is the end timing of 2 rounds (that is, the final round), the end of the small hit is set (S3911), This process ends and returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, as the type of “special jackpot”, the round in the jackpot game is eight rounds in the jackpot A and the jackpot B in addition to the round in the jackpot game Is configured to provide jackpot C and jackpot D for two rounds. By providing a two-round jackpot with a small number of prize balls that can be obtained, it is possible for the player to play a game in the hope of winning the eight-round jackpot with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, if the player wins the 8 round jackpot as expected by the player, a greater satisfaction can be given to the player. In other words, by providing the jackpot C and jackpot D with a small number of balls, the joy of winning the jackpot A and jackpot B with a large number of balls is increased, and the benefits of the jackpot A and jackpot B can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the small hit A and the small hit B are provided separately from various big hits. In the case of winning various types of jackpots, based on the lottery results performed by the lottery device 300, after the jackpot, the special symbol is shifted to a high probability state, or the special symbol is shifted to a low probability state and the normal symbol is in a short-time state. However, in the case of a small hit, the state immediately before winning the small hit is continued even after the end of the small hit game. In other words, when the small win A or the small win B is won, the lottery device 300 does not perform a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened before the small hit game is started, and the lottery device 300 It is comprised so that a game ball can enter inside. Further, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are also switched to the front route or the back route, as in the case of winning the jackpot. And it is comprised so that the game ball which entered may be discharged | emitted from the channel | path 323 for discharge | emission, without flowing down to the advancing direction distribution part 330 or later. As a result, even if various types of winnings are won, it seems that the player will be determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol by the game balls that have entered the lottery apparatus 300. Can be made. Therefore, until the player confirms whether or not the game ball has flowed down to the traveling direction sorting unit 330 or later, the player cannot identify whether the winning ball is a big hit or a small hit, and expects the big hit A feeling can be maintained for a longer time. And if it is a big hit as expected by the player, greater satisfaction can be given. In other words, by providing the small hits A and small hits B where the special symbol transition to the high probability state is not performed, the pleasure of winning the various jackpots that may shift to the high probability state of the special symbol It can increase the value of various jackpots.

  In addition, the player determines whether the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b provided in the traveling direction distribution unit 330 of the lottery apparatus 300 is the front route state or the back route state during the game. It can be visually recognized. In addition, the player also determines whether the state of the sorting rotator 341 provided in the entrance allocator 340 of the lottery device 300 is a leftward swing or a rightward swing during the game. It can be visually recognized. When the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route and the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right, the game ball that has entered the lottery apparatus 300 is 501 will be entered. That is, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, in such a case, the player feels that the game ball does not want to travel to the direction of the traveling direction sorting unit 330 and thereafter, so that the player can enter the lottery apparatus 300 in the hope that the current hit will be a small hit. You will confirm the whereabouts of the game balls you have struck.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is expected to switch to the near route which is advantageous for the player until the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched after the third symbols are arranged. A player can play a game. When the game ball flows down the front route, the game ball enters either the probability variation entrance port 502 or the probability variation entrance port 504, and therefore the state of the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left (FIG. 13). , See FIG. 15), because the next lottery shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  In addition, after the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the front route, until the game ball enters the lottery apparatus 300, the game ball advances to the direction of the traveling direction distributing unit 330 (that is, the current hit is It is possible to make a player play a game in anticipation of being a big hit. Furthermore, from the start of the jackpot game to the end timing of the second round, it is possible to cause the player to play the jackpot game with the expectation that the third round will be entered. This is because there are only two types of jackpot types, eight round jackpots and two round jackpots, so that when the third round is entered, it is determined that eight rounds are jackpots.

  On the other hand, when the winning combination (any one of various big hits and various small hits) is won, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route side, the game ball proceeds to the traveling direction sorting unit 330. It will flow down the back route. Therefore, the state of the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right (see FIGS. 12 and 14), which is a disadvantageous state compared to the swinging state to the left. It is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the game will not proceed to 330 or later (that is, the current hit is a small hit).

  Therefore, according to conditions such as the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the sorting rotator 341, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while holding various expectations at various timings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, the lottery device 300 for performing the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol when the big symbol of the special symbol is won is displayed in front of the variable display unit 80. It is arranged in the right direction of view, and is configured to draw a lottery whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before the start of the big hit game. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the jackpot game is started. When the opening 65a is opened, the lottery apparatus 300 can be made to enter a game ball.

  Since the lottery gate 310 is arranged inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the open / close state of the lottery gate 310 and the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are drawn. Although it is difficult for the player to see whether or not the player has entered the gate 310, each component of the lottery device 300 after the flow path 320 is configured to be visible to the player as in the other embodiments. Yes.

  In addition to the lottery device 300, the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be discharged into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the game ball passes. A ball discharge passage 701 (not shown) is provided, and when the lottery gate 310 is closed, the game ball is discharged through the ball discharge passage 701. . On the other hand, when the lottery gate 310 is opened and a game ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the game ball can enter the lottery device 300 from the lottery gate 310. The game balls that have entered the lottery apparatus 300 are discharged from the ball discharge passage 323 or the ball discharge passage 421. Even when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the discharge path 701 is not entered into the lottery gate 310 by the trajectory of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. May progress to.

  With the above-described configuration, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity by the lottery apparatus 300 while acquiring a winning ball simply by launching a game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, four types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the jackpot type In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, there are 6 types of jackpot types (front route jackpot A, front route jackpot B, front route jackpot C, back route jackpot A, back route) It has increased to jackpot B, back route jackpot C).

  The front route jackpot A and the front route jackpot B are jackpots with eight rounds. Further, the front route jackpot C is a jackpot of two rounds of jackpot rounds. The front route jackpots A to C open the lottery gate 310 when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set in a direction to distribute the game balls to the front route.

  The back route jackpot A and the back route jackpot B are jackpots with 8 rounds. The back route jackpot C is a jackpot of two rounds of jackpot rounds. The back route jackpots A to C open the lottery gate 310 when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set in a direction to distribute the game balls to the back route.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, in each jackpot, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the front route or the back route according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the ROM 202 are changed in the main controller 110. In addition, instead of the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203, a round start flag 203l, a closing flag 203m, a lottery execution flag 203n, a big hit end flag 203o, and a passage opening flag 203p are provided. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 61) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the second embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 65, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the present embodiment replaces the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 in the second embodiment, a round start flag 203l, a close flag 203m, a lottery execution flag 203n, and a big hit end flag 203o. A passage opening flag 203p is provided. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of 2nd Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The round start flag 203l is a flag indicating a timing for determining whether or not to open the lottery gate 310, and is turned on when a new round is started in a big win or a small win (see S1134 in FIG. 69). Then, after the lottery gate 310 is set to open, it is turned off (see S4007 in FIG. 71).

  The closing flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not it is time to close the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 in the big hit game. The round ends during the big hit and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed. When turned on, it is turned on (see S1135 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, it is turned off when the big hit starts and when the lottery gate 310 is closed.

  The lottery execution flag 203n is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery apparatus 300 has executed a lottery for shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol, and the game ball is a short-time entrance ball opening 501 or a probable entrance ball entrance 502-504. Is turned on when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the entrances, and turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1133 in FIG. 69).

  The jackpot end flag 203o is turned on when the jackpot end is set (see S1137 in FIG. 69), and is turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1134 in FIG. 69). The passage opening flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 is opened and a game ball can enter the guide passage 321. The passage opening flag 203p is turned on when the lottery gate 310 is opened. (See S4006 in FIG. 71), it is turned off at the time of the big hit start or when the lottery gate 310 is closed (see S4005 and S4014 in FIG. 71).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 shows the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b of the second embodiment, the correspondence between the random number value of the first hit type counter and the jackpot type is defined, but in the third embodiment, in addition to this, The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the lottery gate 310 for each round number are defined for each jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the third embodiment, when the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0-9, the previous route jackpot A is won. In the front route jackpot A, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened, and a game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and accordingly, a game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 10 to 59, the previous route big hit B is won. In the front route jackpot B, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. In addition, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened in rounds other than the second round, and a game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and accordingly, a game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 60 to 69, the previous route big hit C is won. In the front route jackpot C, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the second round, and the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened, and the game ball enters the guide passage 321. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route state. Since the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened, a game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 70 to 74, the back route jackpot A is won. In the back route jackpot A, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route state in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened, and a game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and accordingly, a game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 75 to 95, the back route jackpot B is won. In the back route jackpot B, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route state in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. In addition, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened in rounds other than the second round, and a game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and accordingly, a game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 96 to 99, the back route jackpot C is won. In the back route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route state, and the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, so that the game ball enters the guide passage 321. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Since the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened, a game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

  As described above, even if the lottery gate 310 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a does not necessarily advance into the lottery gate 310, and the ball discharge passage 701 There is a case to enter. In addition, the round may end without entering one ball into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in one round. For these reasons, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the player must Since it is not possible to determine whether or not it is, it is a big hit of the front route (front route big hit AC) just by checking the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b, or a big hit of the back route (back route big hit AC) ) Cannot be determined. Therefore, the expectation whether the current jackpot is a jackpot of the front route advantageous to the player can be maintained for a longer time.

  When winning a small hit A, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b switches in the same manner as the front route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit. In addition, when the small hit B is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b switches in the same manner as the back route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit.

  In this way, by making the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b common to a part of the big hit and the case of the small win, just confirming the operation of the flow distribution valves 331a and 331b makes the big hit small It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it is a hit. Therefore, the expectation to the jackpot can be maintained for a longer time.

  The first hit type selection table 202b is not limited to the combination of FIG. For example, the round for opening the lottery gate 310 may be limited to only one round regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the operations of the passage switching valves 331a and 331b may be common, and only the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened may be changed.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  Among these special symbol variation processing (S104), in S201 to S211, S221 and S213 and S214, S201 to S211, S221 and S213 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S214 are executed. In the special symbol variation process according to the third embodiment, it is determined in S211 that the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is a special symbol jackpot. In the case (S211: Yes), next, the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), and this process ends. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S221 that the current lottery result is a special symbol small hit (S221: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S232). The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main controller 110.

  Among the main processes of the main controller 110, in the processes of S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 61) of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S1017 are executed. In the main process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is executed instead of the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63) in the second embodiment. . The jackpot control process 3 is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, similarly to the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63).

  When the big hit control process 3 is completed, the big hit control process 2 (S1032) is executed instead of the small hit control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment. This small hitting control process 2 (S1032) is similar to the small hitting control process in the second embodiment (FIG. 64), executes various effects according to the small hitting, and opens a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Or a process for closing.

  When the small hit control process 2 (S1032) is completed, a flow path switching process (S1033) is then executed. This flow path switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. When this flow path switching process (S1033) is completed, a small hit setting process (S1034) is executed. The small hit setting process (S1034) is a process of switching the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit. When the small hit setting process (S1034) is completed, each process after S1006 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031).

  Of the jackpot control process 3, the same processes as S1101 to S1111 and S1122 of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 63) in the second embodiment are executed in the processes of S1101 to S1111 and S1122. The In the jackpot control process 3 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, the round start flag 2031, the closing flag 203m, and the lottery execution flag 203n are turned off (S1131 to S1133). The jackpot end flag 203o and the passage opening flag 203p are also turned off after the processing of S1102 (not shown).

  In the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1105 ends, the round start flag 203l is turned on (S1134), and it is time to set the open / close state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. Then, the process proceeds to S1106 and subsequent steps. Based on the fact that the round start flag is turned on by the process of S1134, various settings according to the jackpot type are performed by a flow path switching process (S1033) described later.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1109 is completed, the closing flag 203m is turned on to indicate the closing timing of the lottery gate 310 (S1135). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C (that is, whether or not it is a two-round jackpot) (S1136). As a result of the processing of S1136, when it is determined that neither the back route jackpot C nor the front route jackpot C is (i.e., 8 rounds of jackpot) (S1136: No), the processing proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1136, when it is determined that the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C (S1136: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122), 2 Otherwise (that is, if it is 1), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122: Yes), the jackpot end is set (S1111), the jackpot end flag 203o is turned on (S1137), and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the small hitting control process 2 (S1032) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process 2 (S1032).

  Of the small hitting control process 2, the processes of S3901 to S3911 execute the same processes as the respective processes of S3901 to S3911 of the small hitting control process (see FIG. 64) in the second embodiment. Then, in the small hit control process 2 in the third embodiment, when the process of S3902 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned off (S3921), and this process ends. When the process of S3905 is completed, the round start flag 2031 is turned on in order to set the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the small hit type in the small hit setting process (see FIG. 72) described later. (S3922), the processing after S3906 is executed.

  Next, the flow path switching process (S1033) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this flow path switching process (S1033). The flow path switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310.

  In this flow path switching process (S1033), it is first determined whether or not the round start flag 2031 is on (S4001). If it is determined that the round start flag 2031 is on (S4001: Yes), The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the first hit type selection table 202b (S4002). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, when it is the start timing of the fifth round), in the first hit type selection table 202b, “▲ "Is attached and it is defined that the flow path is in the back route, so the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route.

  In the present embodiment, since the round start flag 203g is turned on both at the round start timings at various jackpots and at the round start timings at various jackpots, the round start flag 203g is set based on the fact that the round hit timing starts. In some cases, the process proceeds to the process of S4002. In this case, it is determined that it is not a big hit (that is, a big hit) and this process is terminated.

  When the processing of S4002 ends, it is specified whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 based on the big hit type and the first hit type selection table 202b (S4003). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, when it is the start timing of the fifth round), in the first hit type selection table 202b, “▲ "Is attached, and it is specified that the lottery gate 310 is closed so that the game ball cannot advance into the guide passage 323. Therefore, it is specified that the lottery gate 310 is closed. .

  When the processing of S4003 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the result of specifying whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 indicates that the lottery gate 310 is closed (S4004), and the specific result indicates closing. If yes (S4004: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed, the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4007. On the other hand, if the specific result is not closed, that is, indicates that the lottery gate 310 is opened (S4004: No), the lottery gate 310 is opened and the passage opening flag 203p is turned on (S4006). The process proceeds to S4007. In the process of S4007, the round start flag 203g is turned off (S4007), and this process ends.

  In the process of S4001, when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is not on (that is, off) (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the close flag 203m is on (S4008). If it is determined that the closing flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S4008: No), the process of S4009 to S4014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4015.

  On the other hand, if the closing flag 203m is on (S4008: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009). If it is not on (that is, if it is off), the jackpot end timing is determined. Therefore, the processing of S4010 and S4011 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4012.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010). If the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010: Yes), a game ball has already been placed in any of the entrances in the lottery apparatus 300 (one of the short-time entrance entrance 501 and the probability change entrance entrances 502 to 504). Since the ball is entered and it is determined whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, the processing of S4011 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4012.

  On the other hand, if the lottery execution flag 203n is off (S4010: No), it means that it has not been determined whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The probability variation flag 203e is turned off, 100 is set in the hour / hour counter 203f so as not to end the jackpot without determining the state after the end (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4012. In other words, if it is not yet determined whether the transition to the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot has ended is just before the jackpot ends, a game ball enters the short-time entrance 501 It will be in the same state.

  In the processing of S4012, it is determined whether or not the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012). If the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is opened, so that it is opened. The lottery gate 310 is closed (S4013), the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4014), and the process proceeds to S4015. On the other hand, if the passage opening flag 203p is not on (that is, if it is off), the processing of S4013 and S4014 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4015.

  Next, in the process of 4015, it is determined based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d whether or not a game ball has entered any of the entrance holes of the probability changing entrances 502 to 504 (S4015), If it is determined that a ball entering any of the probability variation entrances has been detected (S4015: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on (S4016) in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit (S4016). Then, the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that no gaming ball has entered any of the probability changing entrances 502 to 504 (S4015: No), whether or not the gaming ball has entered the short time entrance 501. Is determined based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d (S4017). If it is determined that the player has entered the ball (S4017), the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state after the jackpot is ended, and the normal symbol is shortened. In order to enter the state, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off, the hour / middle counter is set to 100 (S4018), and the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on to end the present process. If it is determined in the process of S4017 that the ball has not entered the short time entrance 501, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the small hit setting process (S1034) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the small hit setting process (S1034). The small hit setting process is a process of switching the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit.

  In this small hit setting process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203g is on (S4101). If it is determined that the round start flag 203g is on (S4101: Yes), the round counter The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the value of 203g and the small hit type (S4102). In addition, as above-mentioned, the setting of the flow path switching valve 331a and 331b in each round is common with the small hit A and the front route big hit C. That is, if the small hit type is small hit A, the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round), the flow path The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the front route (see FIG. 66). Similarly, the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in each round is common for the small hit B and the back route big hit C. That is, if the small hit type is small hit B, the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round), the flow path The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route (see FIG. 66).

  If the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set by the processing of S4101, then the lottery gate 310 is closed to prevent the game ball from entering the guide passage 323 (S4103), and the round start flag 203l is turned off. In step S4104, the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the round start flag 203l is OFF, the process of S4102 to S4104 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. A lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are provided at different positions, and a game ball is put into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a until the lottery result by the lottery apparatus 300 is fixed. If it is configured such that it cannot be entered, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 well, the game ball will be consumed, which may cause the player to feel lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after the start of the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity by the lottery device 300 while acquiring a ball by simply launching a game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Can do. Therefore, since lots of game balls are not consumed in order to cause the lottery apparatus 300 to perform lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 also performs lottery during the jackpot game, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched. Since these patterns are also varied according to the jackpot type, it is difficult for the player to grasp the round in which the lottery device 300 performs the lottery.

  Therefore, the player can have the jackpot game played while carefully checking the state of the lottery apparatus 300, so that the jackpot game becomes a monotonous operation for simply obtaining a ball. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and the lottery gate 310 is opened (opening of the guide passage 321) with almost no time lag. Similarly, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the closing of the lottery gate 310 are performed almost without any lag. On the other hand, the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be configured to deviate from the start timing of the round. Moreover, you may comprise so that the opening / closing timing of the guidance channel | path 321 may shift | deviate from the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening | mouth) 65a.

  The gap in the opening / closing timing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the opening / closing timing of the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in one round during the big hit game. . 73 (a) and 73 (b), the chart described as “Large opening” shows the open / closed state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. The described chart shows the open / close state of the guide passage 321 (open / close state of the lottery gate 310). In each chart, “open” indicates the open state, and “closed” indicates the closed state.

  FIG. 73A shows a case where the jackpot type is any one of the front route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the front route state, and the jackpot type is the back. One of the route jackpots A to C and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b being in the back route state (that is, a state in which a game ball can enter the guide passage 321) It is a timing chart which shows the timing of opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the timing of opening and closing the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in the case of a round to be performed).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), a time lag (for example, 3 seconds) is generated before the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a is opened with respect to the round start timing. And it is comprised so that a time lag (for example, 2 second) may arise after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened until the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened. As a result, the game ball can enter the guide passage 321 after the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b has been reliably switched, so that the game ball is distributed in the traveling direction during the switching of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. It is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the section 330 and traveling along the route opposite to the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b.

  In addition, a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) is generated from when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed to when the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed. As a result, game balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a just before the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied are also allowed to enter the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Therefore, the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed before the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a reaches the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

  FIG. 73 (b) shows a case where the jackpot type is any one of the front route jackpots A to C and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the back route state, and the jackpot type is the back. One of the route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the state of the front route (that is, the game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321) It is a timing chart which shows the timing of opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the case of a round) and the timing of opening and closing the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the guide passage 321 (the lottery gate 310) is opened for a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, and the specific winning opening (large) The opening 65a is configured to be opened when the guide passage 321 (the lottery gate 310) is closed. Thereby, it can suppress that a game ball enters into the guidance path 321 (the gate 310 for lottery). In addition, as described above, the player can recognize that the guide passage 321 (the lottery gate 310) is opened in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if the lottery is not performed, it can give a sense of expectation that the lottery may be performed in this round.

  Note that the timing at which the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened depends on whether or not it is a round that allows a game ball to enter the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Rather than before or after the opening 65a is opened, the timing at which the guide passage 321 (the lottery gate 310) is opened in all rounds is before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. Anyway.

  Then, in the round in which the game ball can enter the guide passage 321 (the lottery gate 310), the flow path switching is performed in order to enter the game ball after the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is completed. The valves 331a and 331b may be set at the same time as the start of a new round.

  By configuring in this way, even if the opening timing of the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is confirmed, it is a round that allows a game ball to enter the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). It can be difficult to tell whether this round is a round where a special symbol will be drawn to a high probability state, and the player's expectation will be maintained longer. Can do.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and among the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310, there are game balls that can proceed to the guide passage 322. A passage closing valve 324 was provided so as to be limited to one ball. The game ball whose progress to the guide passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324 is discharged to the outside of the lottery apparatus 300 through the ball discharge passage 323.

  On the other hand, in this modification, all the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 can be advanced to the guide passage 322. That is, as a configuration in which the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, all the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 can reach the sorting rotator 341.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, based on the entrance (the time entry entrance 501 and the probability change entrance 501 to 504) into which the game ball first entered after the lottery gate 310 was opened, It is configured to determine whether the special symbol has a high probability state or a special symbol has a low probability state after the jackpot.

  By configuring in this way, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, so that the lottery apparatus 300 can be made compact. Therefore, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the lottery apparatus 300 provided in the inside can be raised.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15 again, the operation of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened will be described.

  As described above, in this modification, since the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, the ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and goes to the open lottery gate 310. All of the game balls that have entered the ball reach the traveling direction distribution unit 330. As described above, in the traveling direction sorting unit 330, the route that the game ball travels is determined according to the jackpot type, and in the case of the front route jackpots AC, the flow path switching valve 331a of the traveling direction sorting unit 330 is determined. , 331b is the state shown in FIG. 9B (the state of the previous route). Therefore, the game ball flows down to the front side of the sorting rotator 341. On the other hand, in the case of the back route jackpots A to C, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the traveling direction sorting unit 330 is the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball flows down to the back side of the sorting rotator 341.

  First, the state of the back route and the state where the sorting rotator 341 has swung to the right will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the back route and the state where the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right, the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 341 travels through the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12A). As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12B) falls without swinging the sorting rotator 341 and enters the short time entrance 501 (FIG. 12C). ). In other words, the entrance for the first entry of the game ball that entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the short time entrance 501. As a result, after the jackpot is over, the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and becomes the short time state of the normal symbol for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100).

  In addition, since the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 341 in the same round of jackpots also travel through the guide passage 408a in the same way, all the game balls can be quickly entered without swinging the sorting rotator 341. Enter 501. Therefore, when the round route starts and the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right, the big hit is the same as when the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the time of completion, the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right side, and the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, and at the same time the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100). It becomes a short time state.

  Further, the state of the front route and the state where the sorting rotator 341 has swung to the right will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. In the state of the front route and the state in which the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right, the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 341 travels through the guide passage 408b. As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guide passage 408b is prevented from traveling by the ball stopper 403a (FIG. 13A). Thereafter, based on the fact that the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 403a, it rotates until the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left (FIG. 13B), and the sorting rotator 341 rotates. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probability variation entrance port 502. That is, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the specific winning opening (large opening entrance) 65 a first enters becomes the probability variation entrance 502. Thereby, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

  On the other hand, the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 341 within the same round of the jackpot proceed through the guide passage 408d because the direction of the sorting rotator 341 has changed to the left (FIG. 15). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15A) enters the probability variation entrance 504 without swinging the sorting rotator 341 (FIG. 15C). Therefore, the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 enter the probability variation entrance 504 without swinging the distribution rotator 341 except for the game balls that have first reached the distribution rotator 341.

  Accordingly, when the round is started and the state of the front route is in the state where the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right side, as in the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, the big hit At the time of termination, the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left, and the state shifts to a special symbol high probability state.

  The state of the back route and the state in which the sorting rotator 341 has swung to the left will be described with reference to FIGS. In the state of the back route and the state where the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left, the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 341 travels through the guide passage 408c. As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guide passage 408c is prevented from traveling by the ball stopper 405a (FIG. 14A). Thereafter, based on the fact that the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 405a, it rotates until the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right (FIG. 14B), and the sorting rotator 341 rotates. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probability variation entrance 503. That is, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the specific winning opening (large opening entrance) 65 a first enters is the probability variation entrance 503. Thereby, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

  On the other hand, the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 341 within the same round of the jackpot proceed through the guide passage 408a because the direction of the sorting rotator 341 has changed to the right (FIG. 12). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12A) enters the short time entrance 501 without swinging the sorting rotator 341 (FIG. 12C). Therefore, the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 enter the short-time entrance 501 without swinging the distribution rotator 341 except for the game balls that have first reached the distribution rotator 341. Note that, as described above, since the state after the big hit is set based on the type of the first entrance, the game balls other than the game balls that first reach the sorting rotator 341 are time-short entrances. No matter how many balls enter 501, the setting of the state after the jackpot is not overwritten.

  Accordingly, when the round starts and the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left, the big hit is the same as when the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the time of termination, the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the right side, and the state shifts to a special symbol high probability state.

  Next, the state of the front route and the state where the sorting rotator 341 has swung to the left will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the front route and the state where the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side, the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 341 travels through the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15A). As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15B) falls without swinging the sorting rotator 341 and enters the probability variation entrance 5034 (FIG. 15C). ). That is, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the specific winning opening (large opening entrance) 65 a first enters becomes the probability variation entrance 504. Thereby, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

  In addition, since the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 341 in the same round of the jackpot travel through the guide passage 408d in the same way, all the game balls can be reliably changed without swinging the sorting rotator 341. Enter the mouth 504. Accordingly, when the round is started and the state of the front route is in the state where the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left side, similarly to the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, the big hit At the time of termination, the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left, and the state shifts to a special symbol high probability state.

  As described above, in this modified example, based on the entrance (the short entrance entrance 501 and the probable entrance entrance 502 to 504) into which the game ball first entered after the gate 310 for lottery was opened. Even if a plurality of game balls progress to the sorting rotator 341 by determining whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a special symbol in a low probability state after the jackpot is over, The lottery result by the device 300 can be the same result as in the other embodiments. Further, the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 at the end of the jackpot can be set to the same state as in the other embodiments.

  Thereby, since the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted and the lottery apparatus 300 can be made compact, the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be increased.

  In the third embodiment and the modification of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the opening pattern of the lottery gate 310 and the flow path switching pattern are provided. Were changed according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the lottery apparatus 300 may be provided outside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the lottery apparatus 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be used as the specific winning openings, respectively. In this case, the lottery device 300 is defined as the first specific prize opening, the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a is defined as the second specific prize opening, and the lottery gate 310 is opened in the first hit type selection table 202b. In the round in which a game ball can enter the guide passage 321, the first specific winning opening (lottery device 300) is opened and the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65 a) is closed. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is closed in the first hit type selection table 202b to limit the game balls to the guide passage 321, the first specific prize opening (lottery device 300) is closed and the second specific prize opening is closed. What is necessary is just to open | release (specific winning opening 65a).

  In the third embodiment and the modification of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside one specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. However, there are two specific winning openings (large opening). (Special winning opening (large opening) 65a1, 65a2), and the game balls won in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 flow down to the front side of the sorting rotary body 341, and the specific winning You may comprise so that the game ball won to the opening | mouth (large opening opening) 65a2 may flow down to the back | inner side of the distribution rotary body 341. FIG. In the round in which the lottery gate 310 is defined to be opened in the first hit type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is opened and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is closed. To do. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is closed in the first hit type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is closed and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is opened. do it. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the lottery gate 310 and the traveling direction sorting unit 330, so that the lottery apparatus 300 can be made compact.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probability variation ball opening 502 or the probability variation ball opening 504, the sound lamp control device 113 has entered a loop state that is advantageous to the player. Is transmitted (a loop status command). Then, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the variation pattern in a special manner for the loop state based on the reception of the loop state command, and can suggest that the current state is advantageous to the player. It was configured as follows.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern effect, the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot is executed in a manner corresponding to the state of the lottery device 300 or the like. It is configured to be able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after the jackpot stop symbol is stopped, the lottery device 300 performs lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before starting the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened at the start of the eighth round, which is the final round, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state. It is configured as follows.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the sound lamp control device 113 has a jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b in the ROM 222 and a jackpot battle selection table 222c. And a state flag 223f is provided in the RAM 223. Moreover, the partial process included in the command determination process (FIG. 40) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, the ROM 222 included in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a big hit battle fluctuation pattern table 222b and a big hit battle selection table 222c. In addition, the RAM 223 included in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a status flag 223f in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b is used to determine a detailed aspect of the fluctuation pattern based on the rough fluctuation pattern aspect notified by the fluctuation pattern command in the same manner as the fluctuation pattern table 222a. A plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined for each rough mode of the variation pattern notified by the command. The difference between the jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b and the fluctuation pattern table 222a is that the jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b defines an effect mode of a fluctuation pattern effect informing that the jackpot is won.

  The jackpot battle selection table 222c defines the mode of display effects performed in the third symbol display measure 81 during the jackpot, and the selectable display modes are varied depending on the state of the lottery apparatus 300 and the like. .

  The state flag 223f is a flag indicating which state is the current state among states A to F defined in a state setting table (not shown) to be described later, and a variation pattern mode is selected from the big hit battle variation pattern table 222b. This flag is taken into consideration when selecting (see S2713 in FIG. 80) or selecting an effect mode that is a big hit from the big hit middle battle selection table 222c (see S4206 in FIG. 81).

  Next, referring to FIG. 75 to FIG. 78, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot is achieved in the present embodiment and a display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot. A production aspect will be described.

  FIG. 75 is a state setting table showing the flow of effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This state setting table is set in the ROM 222. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are three states, state A, state C, and state E, when the variation pattern effect that is a big hit is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and each state Then, the production mode of the selected variation pattern production is different.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are three states, state B, state D, and state F, when the display effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, In each state, the display aspect of the selected display effect is different.

  In the state A to the state F, a story-like effect is executed, and it is suggested whether the state is a loop state or a special symbol high-probability state depending on the result of the effect to be executed. It is configured as follows. Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect modes of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described in order from the state A.

  State A indicates a normal state (ie, during a low probability state of a special symbol), whether the jackpot jackpot type won while staying in state A is a jackpot A or a jackpot B A common performance is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the state A, the hero character with the shield and the sword searches for the enemy monster in the variation pattern production in which the jackpot is notified, and the production until the encounter is performed. . In this effect, a monster can be met, and a stop symbol indicating a jackpot is confirmed and displayed at the timing when the battle (battle) starts. When the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot game is started, the state shifts to the state B (see the state A in FIG. 75).

  It should be noted that, in the off-change performance, the hero searches for the enemy, but the effect that the enemy is not found (cannot meet the enemy) is executed. As a result, since it is impossible to determine whether the effect of searching for an enemy is started or not, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 to the end. .

  FIG. 76A shows the display contents when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed in the effect performed in the state A. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), a character “Start Battle!” Is displayed above the scene where the main character and the enemy are staring at each other, and the battle between the main character and the enemy will start from now on. Is notified. Further, a state in which three “8” symbols are arranged is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the stop symbol at the time of jackpot is not limited to “8”.

  Below the main character and enemies, HP gauges indicating the hit points of the respective characters are displayed. The HP gauge is a gauge representing the life force of each character. In the battle between the main character and the enemy, the gauge decreases when attacked by the opponent, and when the gauge becomes zero, the gauge is knocked out. Although details will be described later, if the HP gauge of the hero is exhausted due to an enemy attack, the player is suggested to shift to a low probability state with a special symbol after the jackpot ends. When the enemy's HP gauge becomes 0, it indicates to the player that the special symbol will shift to a high probability state after the jackpot.

  State B is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the big hit in state A is confirmed and displayed, and the big hit game is started. In this state B, the final stage of the jackpot is the 8th round, where the battle between the main character and the enemy is settled, and the special symbol has a high probability state or the special symbol has a low probability state. It is suggested.

  Specifically, if the hero attacks the enemy and sets the enemy's HP gauge to 0 and can destroy the enemy, it is suggested that after the jackpot ends, it shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol. . On the other hand, if the main character is attacked by an enemy and the main character's HP gauge is zero, it is suggested that the special symbol will shift to a low probability state after the jackpot. In the state B, when the special symbol is shifted to the high probability state, the state shifts to the state C. However, when the special symbol shifts to the low probability state, the state shifts to the state A. That is, the state A and the state B are repeated unless the jackpot A is won and the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (see the state B in FIG. 75).

  State C is a state in which an effect in which the main character wins the enemy in State B is performed, and transition is made after the end of the jackpot game in which the victory effect is performed. The effect to be executed is the same as State A. The difference from state A is that if you win a jackpot in state A, the symbol that shows the jackpot will be displayed after confirming the display, but if you win a jackpot in state C, The difference is that after the symbol to be displayed is fixedly displayed, the state shifts to state D (see state C in FIG. 75).

  The state D is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the big hit in the state C is confirmed and displayed and the big hit game is started. In this state D as well, as in state B, if the main character can reduce the enemy's hit point to 0 in the 8th round, which is the final round of jackpot, it is suggested that the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol after the jackpot ends Is done.

  On the other hand, unlike the state B, in the state C, even if the main character is attacked by an enemy, the HP gauge does not become completely zero, but is in a pinch state. State D is a state that shifts only when the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol in state B, but the case where the state D shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol enters the lottery device 300 This is the case where the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 501 after rotating the state of the sorting rotator 341 to the left-facing arrangement (see FIG. 13). Therefore, after completing the jackpot game being performed in state D, it is confirmed that the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is made regardless of the type of jackpot, suggesting the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol It is not necessary to perform an effect in which the main character's HP gauge is zero.

  However, in the state in which the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left side, when the big hit B is won, the game balls that have entered the lottery apparatus 300 are sorted into the guide passage 408c of the sorting rotator 341, and the sorting rotator 341 After turning the state to the right-facing arrangement, it enters the probability variation entrance 503 (see FIG. 14), so if the big hit B is won next time, it will move to a low probability state with a special symbol. It will be in a state that may end up.

  For this reason, if the jackpot type is the jackpot B in state D, the main character will attack the enemy in the display effect in order to indicate that there is a risk of shifting to a special symbol low probability state after the next jackpot. It is configured to execute an effect that becomes a pinch upon receiving. Moreover, after the effect which becomes a pinch is performed and the jackpot is completed, the state shifts to state E (see state D in FIG. 75).

  FIG. 76 (b) shows an effect performed in the final round (eighth round) of the jackpot B when the jackpot B is won in the state C and the state D is shifted to. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the main character is attacked by the enemy's rush and the HP is greatly reduced. The player is informed that the main character is in a pinch state by the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a disadvantageous state for the player (the state in which the sorting rotator 341 has swung to the right). It can be easily recognized.

  In FIG. 76B, after being attacked by an enemy's rush, the hero is blown away by the impact of the rush, and both the hero and the enemy lose sight of each other. Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the state E that shifts after the end of the jackpot game, an effect that the hero searches for the enemy again is performed.

  In the state D, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the game ball that has entered the lottery apparatus 300 flows down the guide passage 408d. Therefore, the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 remains unchanged in the left-sided state (see FIG. 15), so that the state shifts again to the state C. That is, the state C and the state D are repeated unless the jackpot B is won and the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state (see the state D in FIG. 75).

  The state E is a state in which the jackpot B is won in the state C, and the state shifts after the hero receives an attack of the enemy and performs a pinch effect. In the state E and the state C, the hero moves. If the enemy can search for the enemy and meet the enemy, the effect that the jackpot is confirmed is executed. On the other hand, in the state E, when searching for an enemy or when encountering an enemy, a preliminary performance that is not performed in the state A or the state C is performed.

  Specifically, when the hero discovers medicinal herbs while searching for enemies (see FIG. 77 (a)) or encounters an enemy, an effect is performed in which a dog character who is a hero's companion joins the hero. (See FIG. 77 (b)). If a medicinal herb is found, it can be suggested that there is a possibility that the damage caused by the attack received from the enemy in the state D can be recovered, and if the fellows are energized, it can be suggested that the resistance against the enemy is improved.

  These effects are configured to be easily performed if the jackpot won in the state E is a jackpot A, and difficult to perform if the winning jackpot is a jackpot B (see state E in FIG. 75). Such an effect can enhance the player's expectation for destroying the enemy. When the jackpot is won in state E, the symbol indicating the jackpot is fixedly displayed, and then the state shifts to state F (see state E in FIG. 75).

  The state F is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the big hit in the state E is confirmed and displayed, and the big hit game is started. In this state F as well, as in state B and state D, if the enemy's HP gauge is set to 0 by attacking the enemy, it is suggested that the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the big hit. However, in the state F, since the HP gauge may be decreased or the fellow characters may be joined, the state is different from the state B and the state D.

  Specifically, when transitioning to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends, an effect of defeating the enemy is executed in a display mode as shown in FIG. 78 (a), and the low probability of the special symbol after the jackpot ends In the case of transition to the state, an effect of defeating the enemy is executed in a display mode as shown in FIG. 78 (b). If the enemy wins, the game moves to state C after the jackpot ends, and if the enemy is defeated, the game moves to state A after the jackpot ends.

  When the enemy wins in the state F, the HP gauge is restored after the victory, and an effect that the HP is fully restored is performed. As a result, in the state C, the HP is always in a perfect state, so it is confirmed whether or not the present is an advantageous state (ie, the state where the sorting rotator 341 has swung to the left side) simply by checking the main character's HP. can do.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining a command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  Of the command determination processing of the sound lamp control device 113, in steps S1401, S1403 to S1410, and S1419, S1401 and S1403 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, respectively. ˜S1410 and S1419 are executed in the same way. In the command determination process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1401 is completed, the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) is substituted for the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Execute. The variation pattern selection process 2 is a process for selecting a variation pattern effect corresponding to each of the state A, the state C, and the state E described above.

  If the result of determination in S1408 is No, it is determined whether or not a command related to jackpot game has been received (S1422). The commands related to the jackpot game include all commands related to the jackpot such as the round number command, the opening command, and the interval command.

  In the process of S1422, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1422: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1423), and this process ends. This jackpot effect process (S1423) is a process for setting the display effect during the jackpot in state B, state D, and state F described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game has not been received (S1422: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S1419), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2.

  Of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1421), the process of S2701 executes the same process as the process of S2701 of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Then, in the variation pattern selection process 2 in the fourth embodiment, when the processing of S2701 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 indicates a jackpot variation pattern. (S2711).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2711 that the variation pattern of the jackpot is indicated (S2711: Yes), then the status flag 223f is set from the status setting table (FIG. 75) and the jackpot type (S2712), Next, based on the setting contents of the status flag 223f, a variation pattern for jackpot is selected (S2713), and this process ends. For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state E and the jackpot type is the jackpot A, an effect of encountering an enemy with an effect of acquiring medicinal herbs and an effect of bringing friends together is performed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2711 that the variation pattern of the jackpot is not shown (that is, the variation pattern is a deviation pattern), a variation pattern for deviation is extracted from the received command (S2714), and this process is terminated. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the jackpot effect process (S1423) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect process.

  In the jackpot presentation process (S1423), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S4201: Yes), a state setting table (FIG. 75), A status flag is set from the jackpot type (S4202). For example, when the status flag 223f indicates the status C and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the status flag is updated to indicate the status D (see the status D in FIG. 75).

  Then, a jackpot effect pattern is set based on the state of the set state flag 223f (S4203), and the process ends. For example, if the state flag 223f is a setting indicating the state D and the jackpot type is a jackpot B, the main character is attacked by an enemy and a pinch effect is set as the jackpot effect.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that an opening command has not been received, it is determined whether a ball has entered a different entrance from the setting of the status flag 223f (S4204). For example, when the setting of the state flag 223f indicates the state B and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the game ball should enter the short time entrance 501 but the pachinko machine 10 The jackpot ends when it has been decided that if the player enters any of the probable entrances 502 to 504 for reasons such as vibration, the main character will be defeated. Since it will shift to the high probability state of a special symbol later, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the process of S4204, when it is determined that a ball has entered a different entrance from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204: Yes), the player falls down due to an enemy attack according to the type of the different entrance. The hero will set up an effect that squeezes the last power and rises, attacks the enemy and destroys it, or conversely, the enemy who gets defeated rises and attacks the hero, and the hero loses the turn (S4205), and the process ends.

  By performing the process of S4205, the gaming state after the jackpot can be matched with the result of the display effect during the jackpot, so the gaming state after the jackpot ends and the result of the display effect during the jackpot It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of wrinkles.

  In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the player has not entered the entrance different from the setting of the state flag 223f (that is, the player entered the entrance as set by the state flag 223f) (S4204: No) Then, based on the jackpot effect pattern set in the process of S4203, the mode of display effect during the jackpot is set (S4206), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured to execute a series of effects with a story based on the state of the sorting rotator 341 of the lottery apparatus 300, the winning jackpot type, and the like. ing. These series of effects are configured to be executed in a variation pattern effect in which a jackpot stop symbol is displayed and a display effect during a jackpot game executed after the variation pattern effect.

  As a result, the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 have entered any of the entrances (the time entry entrance 501 and the probability change entrances 502 to 504). Even if it misses, it is easy to recognize whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit by checking the result of the display effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 be able to.

  Also in the present embodiment, the sorting rotator 341 of the lottery apparatus 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and the player can check the sorting rotator 341 to be in an advantageous state for the player (that is, It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the sorting rotator 341 is swung to the left. However, when a player who is unfamiliar with the game plays a game, the player may play the game without knowing what is different between the state in which the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right and the state to which it swings to the left.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display effect during the jackpot game not only suggests whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, but in the high probability state of the special symbol, the hero's HP is It is possible to recognize whether or not the present is an advantageous state depending on whether it is a perfect state that is sufficient or a pinch state in which HP is decreasing. Therefore, even a player who is not used to a game can easily recognize whether or not the present is an advantageous state.

  In the present embodiment, only two types of HP gauges of the main character are provided, i.e., a pinch state or a complete state, but other states may be provided. For example, in addition to the perfect state and the pinch state, add a state where the HP gauge is reduced by about 20%, a state where the HP gauge is reduced by half, and a state where the HP gauge is reduced by about 70%. Also good. In this case, the state of the main character's HP gauge can be stored in the RAM 223, and while the high probability state of the special symbol continues, the HP gauge is held and the special symbol is retained. It may be configured to reset when transitioning to a low probability state. Thereby, since a display effect can be changed in a natural flow including the HP gauge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery apparatus 300 performs lottery in the eighth round, but the lottery may be performed in other rounds. Further, after the stop symbol indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed, the lottery may be performed before the big hit game is started.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and among the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310, game balls that can proceed to the guide passage 322 are provided. Is provided with a passage closing valve 324 so that the number is limited to one ball. The game ball whose progress to the guide passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324 is discharged to the outside of the lottery apparatus 300 through the ball discharge passage 323. In addition, during the big hit, it is configured to switch the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the open / closed state of the lottery gate 310 for each round based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66). Was. Further, the game balls distributed to the front route or the back route by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b flow down any one of the guide passages 408a to 408d of the distribution rotating body 341, and the time-shortening entrance 501; Alternatively, the ball is configured to enter any of the probable entrance balls 502 to 504.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a second variable winning device 140 capable of entering a game ball is provided separately from the variable winning device 65. The second variable prize-winning device 140 includes a second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a, and its opening / closing A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the plate as an axis is provided. Similarly to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. Further, when a big hit is made, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward in the front surface, and the open state in which the ball is likely to win the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is temporarily set. Form.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it replaces with the lottery apparatus 300 (refer FIG. 5) used in 1st-4th embodiment, and is comprised so that the game state after the end of jackpot may be drawn by the lottery apparatus 700. FIG. The lottery device 700 is provided inside the second variable winning device 140. Although the details will be described later, the lottery device 700 of the present embodiment is provided with a ball entrance distributing unit 740 (see FIGS. 92 to 95) for distributing game balls to the game entrances. Is configured to set the gaming state after the jackpot based on the type of entrance where the ball entered. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b provided on the upper surface of the entrance distribution portion 740 is displayed. The distribution rotating body 741 is configured to distribute to either the time-shortening entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504.

  All the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are configured to enter either the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b. . The game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a is configured to flow down a flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotating body 741. In addition, the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742 b is configured to flow down a flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot start is set, it is based on the type of the entrance into which the game ball first entered (one of the short-time entrance 501 and the probability variation entrance 501 to 504). Thus, it is configured to determine whether the special symbol has a high probability state or the special symbol has a low probability state after the jackpot. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is configured to be opened only in the first round, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. doing. That is, the opportunity to draw lots of gaming states to be transferred after the jackpot is limited to the first round of jackpot.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, only the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is changed according to the type of jackpot, and the way of switching between the back route and the near route is determined as a jackpot. It is configured to be the same regardless of the type. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are provided to switch between the back route and the near route (see FIG. 9), but in this embodiment, instead of these, A flow path switching valve 731 (see FIG. 85) is provided. The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b may be applied without replacing the flow path switching valve 731.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-shortening entrance 501 and the probability variation entrance 503 are disposed on the front side of the front view, and the probability variation entrance 502 and the probability variation entrance 504 are on the back side of the front view. (The arrangement of the entrance is reversed with the other embodiments). Therefore, when a game ball flows down the front route, there is a possibility that it will enter the short time entrance 501, so there may be a low probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends, but if a game ball flows down the back route Basically, it shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol. That is, the player is more advantageous when the back route is selected than when the front route is selected.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the second specific prize opening (second large opening) is separate from the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a. Port) 140a, and a lottery device 700 is provided at the subsequent stage of the second specific winning port (second large opening port) 140a. In place of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b, the flow path switching valve 731 (FIG. 85). Reference). In the main controller 110, the content of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 is the same as that of the first hit type selection table 202b of the first embodiment, and the small hit type selection table 202e is abolished. The second large opening switching table 202f and the flow path switching table 202g are provided, and the RAM 203 has a time counter 203q, a ball waiting flag 203r, a large opening flag 203s, a flow path flag 203t, The payout flag 203u is provided, and the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, the big hit end flag 203o, and the passage opening flag 203p are deleted.

  Also, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and a part of the processes included in the main process (FIG. 68) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the third embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<About the configuration of the lottery apparatus in the fifth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the lottery device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the game board 13 in a front view, and the second variable winning device 140 is further in front of the game board 13. It is provided on the right side. Further, a lottery device 700 is provided immediately below the second variable winning device 140. As a result, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a of the second variable winning apparatus are guided to the lottery apparatus 700. In addition, since the lottery device 700 of the present embodiment is provided inside the board surface of the game board 13, the lottery device 700 does not prevent the progress of the game ball. In addition, among the board surfaces of the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the portion on the near side of the lottery device 700 is configured by a transparent member, so that the player can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. It can be confirmed during the game that the game ball that entered the ball flows down.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the outline | summary of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 140 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the lottery apparatus 700 is demonstrated. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the lottery device 700 is provided directly below the second variable winning device 140, and enters the second variable winning device 140 via the second specific winning port (second large opening) 140a. All of the game balls that have entered are configured to flow down to the lottery device 700. The joint portion between the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700 will be described with reference to the following FIGS. 84 to 86.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the second variable winning device 140 and a flow path that is provided inside the second variable winning device 140 and continues to the lottery device 700. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), the second variable prize-winning device 140 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped area through which a game ball can enter through the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a. ing. A lottery device guide hole 141 leading to the entrance entrance distributing portion 740 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped region. All game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the lottery device guide hole 141.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140 are provided with inclinations (inclined portions 142a and 142b) in such a direction that the game balls are lowered toward the lottery device guide hole 141. It has been. In addition, the inclined portions 142a and 142b are configured such that the upper end of the inclination is the same height as the lower side of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. As a result, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are restrained from staying inside the second variable winning device 140, and are reliably transferred to the lottery device guide hole 141. You can enter.

  Downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141, the traveling direction for distributing the game balls to the channel on the front side in the front view (front side channel 732a) or the channel on the back side in the front view (back side channel 732b). A distribution unit 730 is provided. A flow path switching valve 731 (see FIG. 85 (b)) for switching the flow path in which the game ball travels is provided inside the traveling direction distribution unit 730. When the game ball is distributed to the front side flow path 732a by the flow path switching valve 731, the ball enters the front route guide hole 742a provided on the front side of the top surface of the entrance distribution part 740 and is distributed and rotated. Proceed through the channel on the near side of the body 741 (the near route). On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the back channel 732b, the game ball enters the back route guide hole 742b provided on the back side of the top surface of the entrance distribution portion 740, and the back side of the distribution rotating body 741 It advances in the flow path (back route).

  Next, the traveling direction sorting unit 730 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85 (a) is a plan view of the second variable winning device 140 as seen from above, and FIG. 85 (b) shows the second variable winning device 140 and the traveling direction distribution unit 730 in FIG. 85 (a). It is sectional drawing at the time of cut | disconnecting by the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line | wire shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), a lottery device guide hole 141 is provided in the center of the bottom surface inside the variable winning device 140. Further, a flow path switching valve 731 for switching the flow path through which the game balls flow down is provided downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141. The drive shaft 731a of the flow path switching valve 731 and the flow path solenoid 265 are electrically connected. By controlling the flow path solenoid 265, the flow path switching valve with the drive shaft 731a as the rotation axis. 731 is configured to be rotatable. Thereby, the flow path switching valve 731 can be tilted toward the near side or the far side. In addition, as described above, on the downstream side of the flow path switching valve 731, the front side flow path 732 a is provided on the front side in front view, and the back side flow path 732 b is provided on the back side in front view.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the state of the flow path switching valve 731 when the game ball flows down the front flow path 732a and the back flow path 732b will be described.

  FIG. 86 (a) is cut along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a) in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the front side (tilted) by controlling the flow path solenoid 265. It is sectional drawing in the case. As shown in the drawing, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the front side, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 comes into contact with the inner wall portion on the front side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the near-side flow path 732a is shielded by the flow-path switching valve 731 and the game ball cannot enter the near-side flow path 732a. On the other hand, the back channel 732b is open at the top, allowing the game ball to travel. For this reason, when a game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the near side, the game ball is stored in the back flow path 732b. Flow down.

  FIG. 86B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb (see FIG. 85A) in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched (tilted) to the back side. As shown in the figure, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the back side, the distal end portion of the flow path switching valve 731 comes into contact with the inner wall portion on the back side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the back side flow path 732b is shielded by the flow path switching valve 731 and the game ball cannot enter the back side flow path 732b. On the other hand, the upper side of the near-side channel 732a is open, and the game ball can be advanced. For this reason, when a game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the back side, the game ball is moved to the front flow path 732a. Flow down.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 (that is, the portion in contact with the inner wall of the traveling direction distribution portion 730) is positioned higher than the drive shaft 731a. It becomes. That is, the flow path switching valve 731 is in a state of being inclined in the direction of descending toward the flow path partition 733. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has reached the flow path switching valve 731 from resting on the flow path switching valve 731, and to reliably advance the game ball to the lottery device 700.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88, a modified example of the traveling direction sorting unit 730 will be described. When the flow path switching valve 731 is used, the flow path switching valve 731 is inclined in order to reliably advance the game ball to the lottery device 700 without stopping the game ball at the upper part of the flow path switching valve 731. Was configured. For this reason, it is necessary to secure the height for inclining the flow path switching valve 731. In contrast, in this embodiment, the flow path switching member having a substantially flat plate shape is used to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down. Therefore, it can suppress that the advancing direction distribution part 730 becomes vertically long.

  87 (a) and 87 (b) are perspective views of modified examples of the second variable winning device 140. FIG. Inside the second variable winning device 140, it is controlled whether to advance the game ball to the flow path on the front side (front route) of the sorting rotating body 741 or to the flow path on the back side (back route). For this purpose, a flow path switching member 734 is provided. 87 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the channel of the back route is opened by the channel switching member 734, and FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the channel of the front route is opened. It is. First, with reference to FIG. 87 (a), the state where the channel of the back route is opened will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in this modified example, a recess is provided in the center of the bottom surface (between the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b) in the region inside the second variable prize-winning device 140. The front side guide hole 143a for guiding the game ball to the front side route guide hole 742a provided on the upper surface of the entrance distribution part 740 is provided on the front side of the bottom surface of the ball. In addition, on the back side of the bottom of the recessed portion, a device back guide hole 143b for guiding a game ball to the back route guide hole 742b of the lottery device 700 is provided. Further, a flow path switching member 734 that is slidable forward and backward with respect to the second variable winning device 140 is disposed in the recessed portion.

  The height and width of the flow path switching member 734 are configured to be the same as the height and width of the recess provided on the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140. Since the width of the flow path switching member 734 is equal to the width of the hollow portion, there is no gap between the left and right inner wall portions of the hollow and the left and right outer wall portions of the flow path switching member 734. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting caught between the recess and the flow path switching member 734, so that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a It is possible to suppress staying in the second variable winning device 140.

  Further, since the height of the flow path switching member 734 is equal to the height of the recessed portion, the height of the upper surface of the flow path switching member 734 matches the height of the lower ends of the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b. That is, the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b are smoothly connected to the upper surface of the flow path switching member 734. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting stuck between the left and right outer walls of the flow path switching member 734 and the inclined portion 142a or the inclined portion 142b. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the opening 140a from staying inside the second variable winning device 140.

  The flow path switching member 734 is electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265, and is on the front side (see FIG. 87 (a)) or the back side (see FIG. 87 (b)) of the second variable winning device 140. It can be displaced by sliding to either. In addition, on the back side of the second variable winning device 140, a notch of a size that allows the passage switching member 734 to just pass through is provided, and the passage switching member 734 moves back and forth through this notch. It is driven by a flow path solenoid 265.

  The flow path switching member 734 is provided with a ball passage hole 734a having a size through which a game ball can pass, and the game ball that has reached the flow path switching member 734 can flow down through the ball passage hole 734a. . Further, as described above, the flow path switching member 734 slides and displaces the hollow portion on the bottom surface of the second variable prize winning device 140 toward the front side or the back side of the front view, so that the flow path switching member 734 has a front guide hole. It will be in the state which comes just above 143a and apparatus back guide hole 143b.

  FIG. 87A shows a state in which the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced by the flow path solenoid 265 until it comes into contact with the inner wall on the front side (player side) of the second variable winning device 140. Yes. When the flow path switching member 734 is slid to the near side, the apparatus front guide hole 143a is closed by the flow path switching member 734 on the upper side. That is, the game ball cannot pass through the front guide hole 143a. Further, the center of the ball passage hole 734a provided in the flow path switching member 734 coincides with the center of the apparatus back guide hole 143b. Accordingly, since the device rear guiding hole 143b is directly below the ball passing hole 734a, the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 140 are drawn through the ball passing hole 734a and the device deep guiding hole 143b. It will be in the state which can be flowed down to 700 back route guidance holes 742b. As a result, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flow down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotator 741.

  FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which the rear portion including the ball passage hole 734a of the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced by the flow path solenoid 265 until it protrudes to the outside of the second variable winning device 140. ing. In this case, the back route guide hole 742b is in a state where the upper side is blocked by the flow path switching member 734. That is, the game ball cannot pass through the device back guide hole 143b. Further, when the flow path switching member 734 is slid to the back side, nothing obstructs the upper side of the front guide hole 143a (is exposed). In other words, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 can flow down to the front route guide hole 742a of the lottery device 700 through the front guide hole 143a. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  As described above, the flow variable solenoid 265 is set to the state in which the flow path switching member 734 is slid to the front side of the front view or to the back side of the front view, thereby setting the second variable prize. The flow path through which the game ball entering the device 140 flows can be set to either the front route or the back route.

  Next, referring to FIG. 88, a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 in each of the state in which the flow path switching member 734 is slid to the front side and the state to be slid to the back side. A route along which the vehicle travels will be described.

  FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram illustrating a path along which the game ball travels in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid to the front side when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the game balls that have entered the second variable prize winning device 140 through the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a are provided in the flow path switching member 734. The ball passes through the ball passage hole 734a and the device rear guide hole 143b located immediately below the ball passage hole 734a, and enters the back route guide hole 742b of the entrance distribution portion 740. As a result, the game ball flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotator 741.

  FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a path through which the game ball passes in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid to the back side by the flow path solenoid 265. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 through the second specific winning port (second large opening) 140a passes through the front guide hole 143a. Then, the ball enters the route guide hole 742a in front of the entrance distribution portion 740. Thereby, the game ball flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  Thus, in this modification, by controlling the arrangement of the flow path switching member 734 by the flow path solenoid 265, the game ball can be reliably advanced to the flow path to be flowed down.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 95, the entrance entrance distributing unit 740 provided in the lottery apparatus 700 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a structure of the entrance entrance distributing unit 740. FIG. 89 (a) is a front perspective view when the entrance allocator 740 is observed from the front right direction, and FIG. 89 (b) is a view when the entrance allocator 740 is observed from the front left direction. It is a front perspective view. As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the entrance allocating unit 740 includes a distributing rotator 741, and forms a channel through which game balls travel, and the channel The cover member 744 a is attached to the front side of the formation part 743, and the cover member 744 b is attached to the back side of the flow path formation part 743.

  A front route guide hole 742a is formed on the front side of the front view on the upper surface of the entrance distribution portion 740, and a back route guide hole 742b is formed on the back side of the front view. As described above, the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a travels along the flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotation body 741, and the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b is sorted and rotated. It travels through the flow path (back route) on the back side of the body 741.

  On the right side of the entrance distribution unit 740, there are a probability variation entrance 503 (front side in front view) and a probability variation entrance 504 (back side in front view) as entrances into which game balls are distributed by the distribution rotating body 741. ) Are provided (see FIG. 89A). In addition, on the left side of the entrance divide unit 740, as the entrance to which the game balls are distributed by the allocation rotating body 741, the short-time entrance 501 (front side in front view) and the probability variation entrance sphere 502 (front view). (Refer to FIG. 89 (b)). After the start of the jackpot, when the entrance to which the game ball is first distributed is the hour-short entrance 501, the state shifts to a special symbol low probability state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the entrance to which the game balls are initially distributed is the probability change entrances 502 to 504, the game proceeds to a high probability state with a special symbol after the jackpot is over.

  The game balls that have entered the entrances are detected by any of the winning sensors 420a to 420d corresponding to the entrances, and then discharged to the outside of the lottery device 700. In addition, about the structure for discharging | emitting a game ball outside, since it is the same as that of the ball | bowl discharge | emission part 350 (refer FIG. 11) of other embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this embodiment, unlike the other embodiments, when a game ball flows down the front route, the game ball is configured to enter either the short time entrance 501 or the probability change entrance 503. When the ball flows down the back route, the ball is configured to enter either the probability variation entrance port 502 or the probability variation entrance port 504. Therefore, when the back route is selected, it is configured to be advantageous for the player. More specifically, when the route in front is selected and the ball enters the short time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 503, the entrance to which the game balls are distributed in the lottery at the next big hit by the lottery device 700 is displayed. Since it becomes the short time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 502, there is a possibility that a special symbol has a low probability state after the next big hit. On the other hand, when the back route is selected and a game ball enters the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504, the entrance to which the game balls are distributed in the lottery at the next big hit by the lottery device 700 is obtained. Since it becomes the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol not only after the current jackpot but also after the next jackpot.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the back route is configured to be more advantageous to the player, so the game ball is attracted to the near side using a magnet or the like, and the game ball is illegally moved to the near route. Even if it is advanced, it is detrimental to unauthorized players. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing the trajectory of the game ball using a magnet or the like.

  Further, since the flow path forming portion 743 and the cover members 744a and 744b are made of a transparent material (for example, PS material), a game that has entered the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b. The player can visually check the progress of the game ball until the ball enters any of the entrances (time-short entrance 501 or probability variation entrances 502-504).

  FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the entrance opening distributing unit 740. The flow path forming portion 743 is provided with an area for storing the substantially fan-shaped distribution rotating body 741 immediately below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. That is, the sorting rotator 741 is disposed directly below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. Further, the sorting rotator 741 is configured to be swingable left and right around the substantially cylindrical rotator support shafts 806a and 806b, and a game ball is inserted depending on the direction in which the sorting rotator 741 is swinging. You can change the entrance of the ball. The relationship between the direction in which the sorting rotator 741 is swinging and the entrance into which the game ball enters will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95.

  In order to insert the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b of the sorting rotating body 741, the cover member 744a mounted on the front side of the flow path forming unit 743 and the cover member 744b mounted on the back side, respectively. Bearing portions 746a and 746b are provided. Each of the bearing portions 746a and 746b has a shape recessed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and the radius of the recessed portion is slightly larger than the radius of the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b (that is, the rotating body support shaft in the recessed portion). 806a and 806b can be inserted and can be freely rotated). When the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b are inserted into the bearing portions 746a and 746b, respectively. The sorting rotator 741 can be stably swung as a rotating shaft.

  Further, on the surface of the cover member 744a on the flow path forming portion 743 side, guide passages 745a and 745c are provided that allow the game balls that have traveled along the flow path on the near side (front route) of the sorting rotator 741 to flow down the top surface. It has been. The guide passage 745a is a passage inclined in a downward direction toward the time-shortening entrance 501. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has progressed to the guide passage 745a can be made to flow down to the short time entrance 501. Further, the guide passage 745c is a passage that is inclined downward toward the probability variation entrance 503. By this inclination, the game ball that has progressed to the guide passage 745c can flow down to the probability variation entrance 503.

  On the other hand, on the surface of the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, there are provided guide passages 745b and 745d through which the game balls that have traveled through the flow path (back route) on the rear side of the sorting rotating body 741 can flow down. It has been. The guide passage 745 b is a passage that is inclined downward toward the probability variation entrance opening 502. By this inclination, the game ball that has progressed to the guide passage 745 b can be caused to flow down to the probability variation entrance port 502. Further, the guide passage 745d is a passage that is inclined downward toward the probability variation entrance 504. By this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guide passage 745d can flow down to the probability variation entrance 504.

  In addition, among the joint parts of each passage (guide passages 745a to 745d) and each cover member (cover members 744a and 744b), the upper surface side of each passage gently draws an arc (curves). It has a shape. Thereby, when a game ball passes through each passage, the inner side (the side closer to the sorting rotator 741) can flow down. Therefore, since the inner wall portion of each cover member and the game ball can be made difficult to contact, it is possible to suppress separation of each cover member and the flow path forming portion 743 during the game.

  Further, a magnet 747a and a magnet 747b are provided on the surface of the cover member 744a and the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, respectively. Further, magnets 807a and 807b are provided on the front side and the back side of the sorting rotator 741, respectively. In a state where the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the magnet 747a, the magnet 807a, and the magnet 747b are in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is not swung to the right or left (neutral state). And the magnet 807b are provided at overlapping positions.

  Here, the magnet 747a and the magnet 807a are installed in directions that repel each other when the sorting rotator 741 is swung and displaced to a neutral state. Similarly, the magnet 747b and the magnet 807b are installed so as to repel each other. Therefore, even if vibration is applied to the sorting rotator 741, the magnets 807a and 807b provided on the side surfaces of the sorting rotator 741 and the cover member 744a, Since the magnets 747a and 747b provided on the 744b repel each other, the sorting rotating body 741 can be prevented from rotating beyond the portions of the magnets 747a and 747b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the sorting rotator 741 from being switched even though the game ball has not passed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the structure of the sorting rotator 741 provided inside the entrance entrance sorting unit 740 will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the structure of the sorting rotator 741. FIG. 91A is a front perspective view in a state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left side, and FIG. 91B is a front perspective view in a state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side. FIG. 91 (c) is a front view of the state in which the sorting rotator 741 does not swing to the right or left (neutral state), and FIG. 91 (d) shows the sorting rotator 741 to the right. It is a top view in the state (neutral state) which is not shaken to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 91A and 91B, the sorting rotator 741 is provided with a substantially fan-shaped partition member 801. By providing the partition member 801, even if vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or the game ball and the cover members 744a and 744b are repelled, the game ball is removed from the flow path where the game ball has traveled. Can be suppressed.

  Further, on the front side of the partition member 801, a ball repelling portion 802 that rebounds the game ball flowing down the front route to the left in a front view, and a concave shape that receives the game ball flowing down the front route and hinders progress. A ball stopper 804 is provided. The game ball rebounded by the ball repulsion unit 802 flows down the guide passage 745a provided in the cover member 744a and enters the short time entrance 501. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stopper 804, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 804. This load causes the sorting rotator 741 to swing rightward when viewed from the front. As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stopper 804 onto the guide passage 745c and enters the probability variation entrance 503 through the guide passage 745c.

  On the other hand, on the far side of the partition member 801, a ball repelling portion 803 that rebounds the game ball flowing down the back route to the right in a front view and a concave shape that receives the game ball flowing down the back route and hinders progress. A ball stopper 805 is provided. 91C and 91D, the ball repulsion part 803 and the ball stopper 805 have the same shape as the above-mentioned ball repulsion part 802 and the ball stopper 804. That is, the shape is the same when the sorting rotating body 741 is viewed from the front direction and when viewed from the back direction.

  The game ball rebounded by the ball repulsion unit 803 flows down the guide passage 745d provided in the cover member 744b and enters the probability variation entrance 504. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stopper 805, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 805. Due to this load, the sorting rotator 741 swings leftward in a front view. As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stopper 805 onto the guide passage 745b and enters the probability variation entrance port 502 through the guide passage 745b.

  Next, the operation of the game ball that has flowed down to the sorting rotator 741 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting rotator 741 and the game balls when the game balls flow down the back route with the sorting rotator 741 swinging to the right, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the distribution rotary body 741 and a game ball | bowl in case the game ball | bowl flows down the near route in the state which 741 swung to the right side. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting rotator 741 and the game balls when the game sphere flows down the back route with the sorting rotator 741 swinging to the left, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the distribution rotation body 741 and a game ball in the case where a game ball flows down the near route in a state where the rotation body 741 swings to the left side.

  First, with reference to FIG. 92, the case where the flow path is set to the front route and the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right will be described. The game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enters the front route guide hole 742a via the front side flow channel 732a because the flow channel is set to the front route. Sphere and flow down the flow path (front route) on the near side of the sorting rotator 741 (see FIG. 92A).

  In a state in which the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right side, the ball repulsion part 802 is located directly below the front route guide hole 742a, so that the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion part 802 (FIG. 92 ( b)). As a result, the game ball is bounced back in the left direction when viewed from the front, so that the game ball travels along the guide passage 745a and enters the short time entrance 501. In other words, the entrance for the first entry of the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is the short time entrance 501. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and enters the normal symbol time-short state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100).

  In addition, the ball repulsion unit 802 has a slope with an inclination that rises in the upper right direction in a state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side. By colliding with 802, a force in a direction to rotate the sorting rotating body 741 to the right works. However, when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right, there is no room for the sorting rotator 741 to rotate rightward, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 802, The state does not change.

  In the same round of jackpot, the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 741 subsequently travel the same route as before, so that all the game balls have the short time entrance 501 without swinging the sorting rotator 741. Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that have initially entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the short time entrance 501 without changing the state of the sorting rotator 741.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (b) and 93 (c), when the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right side, the bottom surface on the left side of the partition portion 801 is in contact with the flow path forming portion 743. The lower part of the ball repulsion part 802 arranged on the front side and the lower part of the ball stopper part 805 arranged on the rear side when viewed from the front are not in contact with the guide path 745a and the guide path 745b, and a space is generated. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is suppressed that the lower part of the ball repulsion part 802 or the lower part of the ball stopper part 805 and the guide passage 745a and the guide passage 745b are repelled by an impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion part 802. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sorting rotator 741 that has been shaken to the left side from rotating due to the impact of the game ball colliding with the ball repulsion unit 803 from turning to the right side and switching to the right side. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 92A to 92C, in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side, the flow path passes through the lower end of the ball repulsion unit 802 and the center of the flow path where the game ball flows down. The center line O is configured to intersect. That is, since the ball repulsion part 802 is shifted to the right side with respect to the flow path, the game ball that has flowed down the flow path is configured not to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion part 802. Here, since it goes away from the rotation axis of the sorting rotator 741 toward the upper side of the ball repulsion unit 802, the direction in which the game ball collides with the upper side of the ball repulsion unit 802 moves the sorting rotator 741 to the right by the impact of the collision. The force in the direction of turning is increased. When the force to rotate rightward is increased, the force by which the bottom surface of the partition 801 pushes the flow path forming unit 743 is also increased based on the force to rotate rightward. Therefore, the reaction that the partition 801 receives from the flow path forming unit 743 is also strong, so that the sorting rotator 741 is easily rebounded, and the possibility that the sorting rotator 741 is switched to the left side is increased. For this reason, as in the present embodiment, the game ball is configured not to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion unit 802, thereby suppressing the rebound of the sorting rotator 741 and the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 802. Based on this, the sorting rotating body 741 is prevented from switching to a state where it is swung to the left.

  Next, the state of the back route and the state in which the sorting rotator 741 has swung to the right will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 95. FIG. In this state, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has the flow path set to the back route, so the back route guide hole 742b via the back side flow channel 732b. And then flows down a flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  In the state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right side, the ball stopper 805 is located immediately below the back route guide hole 742b, so that the game ball flowing down the back route is received by the ball stop 805 (FIG. 93A). )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 805. That is, since a force is applied to rotate the sorting rotator 741 to the left, the sorting rotator 741 is turned to the left and is swung to the left (see FIG. 93B).

  Further, when the sorting rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the ball stopper 805 that is a part of the sorting rotating body also rotates and tilts to the left side, so that an inclined surface directed downward to the lower left is formed. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stopper 805 rolls down from the ball stopper 805 based on the inclination of the ball stopper 805, travels along the guide passage 745 b, and enters the probable entrance ball opening 502. Enter the ball. In other words, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a first enters becomes the probability changing entrance 502. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol.

  Note that the game balls that have reached the sorting rotating body 741 in the same round of jackpots also travel on the back route in the same manner. As described above, the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 741. Therefore, the ball repulsion part 803 is positioned immediately below the back route guiding hole 742b (see FIG. 95A), and the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion part 803 (FIG. 95B). )reference). As a result, the game ball is bounced back in the right direction when viewed from the front, and thus proceeds along the guide passage 745d (see FIG. 95C) and enters the probability variation entrance 504.

  In other words, the game ball that first entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a is switched to the state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, and enters the probability variation entrance 502. Then, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enter the probability changing ball opening 504 without changing the state of the sorting rotating body 741.

  Further, in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stopper 805 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745d is configured to be less than one game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b from proceeding to the guide passage 745d. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stopper 805 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745d, the sorting rotating body 741 flows down in the middle of rotating to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball. The game ball is sandwiched between the ball stopper 805 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the back route guide hole 742b, and the distribution rotating body 741 can be prevented from operating to the right side or the left side. be able to.

  Next, the case of the front route and the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 94. FIG. In this state, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has the flow path set at the front route, and therefore the front route guide hole 742a through the front side flow channel 732a. And then flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  In a state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left side, the ball stopper 804 is located immediately below the front route guide hole 742a, and thus the game ball flowing down the front route is received by the ball stopper 804 (FIG. 94 (a )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 804. That is, since a force is applied to rotate the sorting rotator 741 to the right, the sorting rotator 741 pivots to the right and swings to the right (see FIG. 94B).

  Further, when the sorting rotator 741 swings to the left side, the ball stopper 804 that is a part of the sorting rotator 741 also rotates and tilts to the right side, thus forming a slope that faces downward to the lower right. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stopper 804 rolls down from the ball stopper 804 based on the inclination of the ball stopper 804, travels along the guide passage 745 c, and enters the probable entrance ball outlet 503. Enter the ball. That is, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a first enters becomes the probability changing entrance 503. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol.

  It should be noted that game balls that have reached the sorting rotating body 741 in the same round of the jackpot proceed in the same way as before. As described above, based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 741, the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right. Therefore, the ball repulsion portion 802 is positioned directly below the front route guide hole 742a (see FIG. 92A), and the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion portion 802 (FIG. 92B). )reference). As a result, the game ball is bounced back in the right direction when viewed from the front, and thus proceeds along the guide passage 745a (see FIG. 92 (c)) and enters the short time entrance 501.

  In other words, the game ball that first entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a is switched to the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right, and enters the probability variation entrance 503. Then, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enter the short-time entering hole 501 without changing the state of the sorting rotator 741.

  Note that, as described above, when the gaming state after the jackpot is set based on the type of the entrance into which the game ball first entered, the setting is held for the jackpot. In other words, the game state setting after the jackpot is overwritten is not overwritten. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot ends is special based on the fact that the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in the first ball enters the probability changing entrance 503. If it is set to the high probability state of the symbol, even if a game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the short-time entrance 501, The gaming state after the end of the jackpot will not be a low probability state of a special symbol. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a structure in which the number of game balls that can be advanced to the sorting rotator 741 is limited to one, the structure of the lottery device 700 can be made compact.

  Further, in a state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stopper 804 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745a is configured to be less than one game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a from proceeding to the guide passage 745a. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stopper 804 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745a, the sorting rotating body 741 flows down on the way to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball. The game ball is caught between the ball stopper 804 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the front route guide hole 742a, and the distribution rotating body 741 can be prevented from operating on the right side and the left side. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a case where the flow path is set to the back route and the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left will be described. The game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enters the back route guide hole 742b via the back side flow channel 732b because the flow channel is set to the back route. Sphere and flow down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotator 741 (see FIG. 95A).

  In the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, the ball repulsion unit 803 is positioned directly below the back route guiding hole 742b, so that the game ball flowing down the back route collides with the ball repulsion unit 803 (FIG. 95 ( b)). As a result, the game ball is bounced back in the right direction when viewed from the front, and thus proceeds along the guide passage 745d and enters the probability variation entrance 504. That is, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a first enters becomes the probability variation entrance 504. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol.

  In addition, in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left side, the ball repulsion unit 803 has a slope with an inclination that rises in the upper left direction, so that a game ball that has fallen from vertically above is a ball repulsion unit. By colliding with 803, a force in a direction to rotate the sorting rotator 741 to the left works. However, when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, there is no room for the sorting rotator 741 to rotate leftward, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 803, the sorting rotator 741 The state does not change.

  In the same round of the jackpot, the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 741 subsequently travel in the back route in the same manner. Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that have initially entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the probability changing entrance 504 without changing the state of the sorting rotator 741.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first entrance hole (second short entrance 501, Based on one of the probable entrance balls 502 to 504), it is configured to determine whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a special symbol in a low probability state after the jackpot ends, and a plurality of games The sphere is configured to be able to travel to the sorting rotator 741. Thereby, since the structure for limiting the game ball which advances to the distribution rotary body 741 to one ball can be omitted, the structure of the lottery apparatus 700 can be made compact.

  Next, how the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching member 734 operate in the first round will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the operations of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching member 734 in the first round. FIG. 96 (a) shows control when the game ball flows down to the front route (when the winning jackpot is a big hit A), and FIG. 96 (b) causes the game ball to flow down to the back route. The control of the case (when the winning jackpot is the jackpot B) is shown.

  First, with reference to FIG. 96 (a), an operation when the game ball is caused to flow down to the front route will be described. In FIG. 96 (a), the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (closed or opened). The correspondence is shown. On the other hand, the lower diagram in FIG. 96 (a) shows the correspondence between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open channel (front channel 732a or back channel 732b). Is shown.

  When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the front route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened immediately after the start of the first round. This open state is a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and immediately closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Then, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed until 7 seconds elapse from the start of the first round. On the other hand, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened from the lapse of 7 seconds until the end of one round. Then, at the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. The first round of jackpot continues until a predetermined time elapses (until 30 seconds elapses or until ten balls are awarded to the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a).

  On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side of the second variable winning device 140 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is blocked until 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. A state in which the back channel 732b is opened). After 6.5 seconds, the flow path solenoid valve 265 tilts the flow path switching valve 731 toward the back side of the variable winning device 140 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is opened and the back side flow path is opened). 732b is blocked). After the flow path switching valve 731 is completely switched to the back side, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side even after the first round is completed.

  In a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the near side, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a short period (for example, 0. 0) immediately after the first round is started. 2 seconds), and it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Therefore, the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a basically after 7 seconds or more have passed since the start of the first round, and the flow path switching valve 731 is moved to the back side. After switching to the tilted state (the state where the near-side flow path 732a is opened), when winning the jackpot A, the player entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a The game ball can flow down to the near-side channel 732a (see FIG. 86 (a)). Accordingly, the game ball can enter the front route guide hole 742a and flow down the channel on the front side (front route) of the sorting rotating body 741.

  Here, the reason that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a short period of time immediately after the first round is started is the jackpot A and the jackpot B at the start of the first round This is because the operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is made common. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96B, but when the big hit B is won, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. In accordance with the operation at the time of the big hit B, also in the case of the big hit A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the jackpot type based on the state of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a when the first round starts. Therefore, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot B that is advantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), an operation when the game ball is caused to flow down to the back route will be described. In FIG. 96 (b), the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state of the second winning prize opening (second large opening) 140a (closed or opened). The correspondence is shown. On the other hand, the lower diagram in FIG. 96 (b) shows the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open channel (front channel 732a or back channel 732b). Is shown.

  When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the back route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. On the other hand, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed during the period from the lapse of 5 seconds to the end of the first round. This closed state is maintained until the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the operation of the flow path switching valve 731 is exactly the same as the operation described in FIG. That is, it is set in a state of being tilted forward until 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (6.5 seconds after the start of the first round), and thereafter It can be switched to the state tilted to the back side. Accordingly, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened, the flow path switching member 734 is always tilted toward the front side, so the second specific winning opening (second large opening) ) The game ball entered into 140a can be caused to flow down to the back channel 732b (see FIG. 86 (b)). Accordingly, the game ball can enter the back route guide hole 742b and can advance to the flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  In addition, the arrangement of the flow path switching valve 731 is switched after a lapse of 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. Mouth) This is to make sure that all the game balls that have entered the ball 140a advance to the back route. That is, even if a game ball enters immediately before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept in the position on the near side for 1.5 seconds. Therefore, it can suppress that the setting (direction to which it inclines) of the flow-path switching valve 731 switches in the state in which the game ball remained in the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 140.

  As described above, the operations of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching valve 731 in the first round of the jackpot have been described in detail, but these are states other than the first round Then, each of the initial states is set. The initial state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a indicates a closed state. The initial state of the flow path switching valve 731 is a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side (that is, a state where the front side flow path 732a is opened and the back side flow path 732b is shielded). . For this reason, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed based on the end of the first round, and is kept closed until the first round of the next jackpot is started. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is set regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off. Set to closed.

  On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side until the next big hit after the end of one round. Then, it is switched to a state of being tilted to the near side after the jackpot stop symbol is fixedly displayed until the first round starts, and after the first round starts, the above-described operation is performed. In addition, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the state tilted to the near side regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off.

  In addition, the switching timing of the flow path and the opening and closing timings of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 140a for each jackpot type are not limited to this embodiment. For example, in the jackpot A, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is not opened immediately after the start of the first round, and the second specific prize opening (second The two large opening openings 140a may be closed. As a result, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened only during the period in which the near-side channel 732a is open, so that the game ball is reliably advanced to the near-side channel 732a. Can do.

  In addition, for example, in jackpot A, the timing at which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened is 27 seconds after the start of the big hit, and the game ball is in the second specific winning slot (second large opening). Mouth) It may be configured to make it difficult to enter the ball 140a. Similarly, in the jackpot B, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open is 3 seconds from the start of the first round, and the game ball is in the second specific winning opening (second large opening). You may comprise so that it may become difficult to enter into the opening | mouth 140a. As a result, when a game ball is launched into the lottery device 700 in the first round, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension, so that the jackpot is simply an operation for obtaining the ball. Can be suppressed. In each jackpot, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened may be lengthened (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, the game balls can be easily advanced into the lottery apparatus 700 in the first round, so that the lottery by the lottery apparatus 700 can be easily received. Therefore, the first round can be played while giving the player a sense of security.

  In the present embodiment, one round is continued until 30 seconds elapse or until ten game balls are won in the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until 12 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won in the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. With this configuration, in the case of jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened 7 seconds after the start of the first round, and the maximum 12 seconds after the start of the first round. 2 The specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. That is, since the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a maximum of 5 seconds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is the same as when winning the jackpot B. 140a can be opened. Therefore, the winning ball obtained in one round can be made equal for jackpot A and jackpot B. Further, in the big hit B, when 5 seconds elapse before 10 game balls are won in the first round, the period until the end of the first round can be shortened. In other words, even if the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed and the player launches a game ball, the period in which no prize ball can be obtained can be shortened. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first round of jackpot, the flow path switching valve 731 starts from a state tilted to the near side, but starts from a state tilted to the far side, and the near side in the middle of the first round You may comprise so that it may switch to the state inclined to. Since the state of the flow path switching valve 731 before the big hit starts is a state tilted to the back side (that is, a state where the game ball can pass the front route), if configured in this way, There is no need to tilt the path switching valve 731 forward. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is fully inclined to the back side, and the game ball advances to the back side flow path 732b despite the big hit B. Can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side is the initial state, but the state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the near side may be the initial state. Thereby, since the setting at the start of the first round matches the initial state, it is not necessary to switch the setting of the flow path switching valve 731 before the first round of jackpot. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is fully inclined to the back side, and the game ball advances to the back side flow path 732b despite the big hit B. Can be suppressed.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment, the RAM 203 included in the main controller 110 of the present embodiment includes a time counter 203q, a ball waiting flag 203r, a large opening flag 203s, a flow path flag 203t, and a payout flag 203u. Is provided. On the other hand, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, the big hit end flag 203o, and the passage opening flag 203p provided in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment are deleted. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of 3rd Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The time counter 203q is a counter that measures the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot round and the elapsed time from the start of the interval period. Based on the time counted by the time counter 203q, the opening / closing of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is controlled (see S4503 in FIG. 103), or a route through which the game ball can flow (front route, The switching of the back route is controlled (see S4603 in FIG. 104).

  The entrance waiting flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has entered any of the entrances (hour-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504) during the big hit. This entrance waiting flag 203r is set to ON when setting the jackpot start (see S241 in FIG. 99), and one of the entrances (the short time entrance 501 and the probable entrance entrances 502 to 504). When it is detected that a game ball has entered the ball, it is set to OFF (see S4310 and S4315 in FIG. 105). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters one of the entrances with the entrance standby flag 203r set to ON, it corresponds to the entrance entrance that entered the ball. It is configured to shift to the state after the jackpot ends.

  The large open mouth flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is in an open state, and when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened. It is set to ON (see S4507 in FIG. 103), and is set to OFF when the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (see S4510 in FIG. 103).

  The flow path flag 203t is a flag indicating whether the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can pass through the front route or the back route, If it is in a state in which it can pass the near route (that is, a state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side), it is set to ON (see S4610 in FIG. 104), and a state in which it can pass through the back route (that is, the flow path) If the switching valve 731 is tilted to the near side), it is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 104).

  The payout flag 203u is a flag that indicates whether or not a game ball has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and a winning ball is being paid out. The payout flag 203u is set to ON after setting the state after the end of the jackpot (see S4310 and S4315 in FIG. 105), and set to OFF at the start of the jackpot (see S1142 in FIG. 101).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A shows the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a second large opening switching table 202f, a flow path, instead of the small hit type selection table 202e provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. A switching table 202g is provided.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment have the same configuration as the first hit type selection table 202b of the first embodiment. That is, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot is A (front route jackpot), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the jackpot B (back) It is determined that the route is a big hit.

  The second large opening switching table 202f is a table that is referred to for opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a during the first round of jackpot. The state of the second large opening 140a is defined in association with the value of the time counter 203g (see FIG. 98 (c)). Specifically, in the case of jackpot A, the value of the time counter 223g is a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 7 seconds, and it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is defined as being opened after 7 seconds. If more than 7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game ball flows is set to the front route (see FIG. 96 (a)), so the second specific prize opening (second The game ball that has entered the large open mouth 140a flows down the front route.

  In the case of big hit B, the value of the time counter 223g is a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 5 seconds, and it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for 5 seconds. Thereafter, it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened. During the 5 seconds from the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game ball flows is set to the back route (see FIG. 96 (b)), so the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a The game ball that entered the ball flows down the back route.

  The flow path switching table 202g has a flow path for flowing down the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a during the big round and the interval period after the end of the first round. It is a table that is referred to for switching, and the flow path state is defined in association with the value of the time counter 203g.

  Specifically, the flow path is defined as the back route until 6.5 seconds elapse from the start of one round. As described above, in the case of jackpot B, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed 5 seconds after the start of the first round, so the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a A margin of 1.5 seconds is provided after the channel is closed until the flow path is switched. Thereby, even if a game ball enters immediately before closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, it is possible to switch the flow path after reliably proceeding to the back route.

  In addition, after 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round, the flow path is defined so as to be the front route until the first round is completed. As described above, the setting of the flow path is controlled so as to be the front route other than the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, even after the first round is completed, the flow path is maintained in the state of the front route. The state of this front route continues until the next jackpot is won and switched to the back route.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. First, FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  Among these special symbol variation processing (S104), in S201 to S211, S221, and S213 and S214, S201 to S211, S231, and S213 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S214 are executed. In the special symbol variation process in the fifth embodiment, it is determined in S211 that the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is a special symbol jackpot ( If the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), then the ball waiting flag 203r is set to off (S241), and this process is terminated.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing of main controller 110.

  Among the main processes of the main controller 110, the processes of S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017 are respectively S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 68) of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The same processes as those in S1017 are executed. And in the main process of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) is executed instead of the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 69) in the third embodiment. . The jackpot control process 4 executes various effects according to the jackpot, opens or closes the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or opens the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. It is a process for opening or closing.

  Further, when the big hit control process 4 is completed, the incoming ball detection process (S1042) is executed instead of the small hit control process 2 (FIG. 70) in the third embodiment. This entrance detection process (S1042) is performed after the jackpot is over, based on the type of entrance (the short entry entrance 501 and the probable entrance entrance 502-504) into which the game ball first entered after the start of the jackpot. This is a process for setting the gaming state. When this entrance detection process (S1042) is completed, each process after S1006 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1041).

  Of the jackpot control process 4 (S1041), in each process of S1101 to S1104 and S1108 to S1111, the same process as the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment is executed. And in jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in 5th Embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, it replaces with the process of S1131-S1133 of jackpot control process 3 (refer FIG. 69) in 3rd Embodiment, S1141, S1142 Execute the process.

  Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: Yes), and if the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 and reset (S1102), the flow path switching member 734 is then moved to the front side when viewed from the front. To set the flow path to the back route (S1141). Then, the large opening port flag 203s, the flow path flag 203t, and the payout flag 203u are set to OFF (S1142), and this process ends.

  In the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, instead of the processes of S1134, S1135, and S1107 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, A round start process is executed (S1143). This round start process (S1143) is a process for setting the start of a round at the timing of starting each jackpot round. When the round start process (S1143) is completed, this process ends. Details of the round start process (S1143) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No). However, in this embodiment, the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is satisfied in the processing of S1108. If it is determined that the process is not performed (S1108: No), the second large opening setting process (S1144) and the flow path setting process (S1145) are executed and then the process is terminated. The second large opening setting process (S1144) is a process for setting the opening / closing of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a, and the flow path setting process (S1145) is the second variable winning apparatus 140. This is a process for setting the inner flow path to either the front route or the back route. Details of the second large opening setting process (S1144) and the flow path setting process (S1145) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104.

  In addition, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process in S1109 is completed, the process in S1146 is executed instead of the process in S1135 and S1136 in the third embodiment, and the process proceeds to S1110. Transition. In the process of S1146, the large opening port flag 203s is turned off (S1146).

  Furthermore, in the process of S1110, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), the process of S1147 is performed. In the process of S1147, the flow path flag 203t and the payout flag 203u are set to OFF (S1147). When the processing of S1147 ends, the end of jackpot is set (S1111), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a round start process (S1143) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this round start process (S1143). The round start process (S1143) is a process for performing various settings for starting a new round.

  In this round start process, first, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S4401). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the round number command is set, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to make the round number of the newly started round coincide with the value of the round number counter 203g (S4402).

  When the processing of S4402 is completed, the value of the time counter 203q is then reset to time the elapsed time from the start of a new round (S4403), and whether the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 or not is determined. It is determined (S4404).

  As a result of the processing of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, any of 2 to 8) (S4404: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. After setting (S4405), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 1, the process of S4405 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is. With this processing, the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set at the start of the second to eighth rounds, and the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  Next, a second large opening setting process (S1144) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the second large opening setting process (S1144). The second large opening opening setting process (S1144) is a process for setting the opening / closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in one round in which the lottery device 300 draws the state after the big hit ends. is there.

  In the second large opening setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4501). If it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, 2 to 8) (S4501: No), the current number is 2 to 8 rounds (and the interval period before the start of these rounds). In any case, there is no need to drive the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, so the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4501 that the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4501: Yes), in order to perform the opening / closing setting of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, Then, the second large opening switching table 202f is read (S4502). Then, the portion corresponding to the current jackpot type in the read second large opening switching table 202f is compared with the value of the time counter 203q, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is compared. The state is specified (S4503), and it is determined whether or not the present time is a period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a should be opened (S4504).

  In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the current period is the open state (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the large open mouth flag 203s is set to ON (S4505), and set to ON. If it has been done (S4505: Yes), it indicates that the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a has already been opened, so this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4505 that the large opening flag 203s is not on (that is, it is off) (S4505: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. Since this indicates that the state is in the state, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the open state (S4506), the large opening port flag 203s is set to ON (S4507), and this processing is performed. Exit. By setting the large opening mouth flag 203s to ON in the process of S4507, in the second large opening opening setting process (S1144) after the next time, in the process of S4505, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Is already open, the process can be terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the current time is not the period in which the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a should be in the open state (that is, the period in which the second specific prize opening is to be closed) (S4504). Next, it is determined whether or not the large opening mouth flag 203s is set to off (S4508). If it is determined to be off (S4508: Yes), the second specific prize opening (second Since this indicates that the (large opening) 140a is in a closed state, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4508 that the large opening flag 203s is not off (that is, it is on) (S4508: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened. Since this indicates that the state is in the state, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (S4509), the large opening flag 203s is set to OFF (S4510), and this processing is performed. Exit. By setting the large opening opening flag 203s to OFF in the process of S4510, in the second large opening setting process (S1144) after the next time, in the process of S4508, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Is already open, the process can be terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a flow path setting process (S1145) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the flow path setting process (S1145). The flow path setting process (S1145) is a process for setting the flow path through which the game ball flows down to either the front route or the back route in the first round in which the lottery device 700 draws the state after the big hit. is there.

  In the flow path setting process (S1145), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4601). If it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, 2 to 8) (S4601: No), the current number is any of 2 to 8 rounds (or intervals before the start of these rounds). Period), and there is no need to switch the flow path, so this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4601: Yes), first, the flow path switching table 202g is read in order to set the flow path (S4602). Then, the flow path switching table 202g that has been read out is compared with the value of the time counter 203q to identify the state of the flow path (front route, back route) (S4603), and the current time period should be set as the back route. It is determined whether or not there is (S4604).

  In the process of S4604, when it is determined that the current period is the period to be set to the back route (S4604: Yes), it is determined whether the flow path flag 203t is set to off (S4605) and set to off. If it is (S4605: Yes), this indicates that the flow path has already been set to the back route (the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted forward), and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4605 that the flow path flag 203t is not off (that is, it is on) (S4605: No), this indicates that the flow path is set to the front route. By tilting the path switching valve 731 to the near side, the back side channel 732b is opened, and the game ball is set so that it can travel the back route via the back route guide hole 742b (S4606). Then, the flow path flag 203t is set to ON (S4607), and this process ends. By setting the large opening port flag 203s to OFF in the process of S4607, it is determined in the subsequent flow path setting process (S1145) that the flow path has already been set to the back route in the process of S4605. The process can be terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S4604 that the present time is not a period to be set for the back route (that is, a time period to be set for the front route) (S4604: No), then the flow path flag 203t is turned on. Is determined (S4608), and if it is determined to be on (S4608: Yes), this indicates that the flow path has already been set to the previous route, and thus the present process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the flow path flag 203t is not on (that is, is off) (S4608: No), it indicates that the flow path is set to the back route. Therefore, by setting the flow path switching member 731 to the back side, the front side flow path 732a is opened, and the game ball is set so as to be able to travel the front route through the front route guide hole 742a (S4609). Then, the flow path flag 203u is set to ON (S4610), and this process ends. Since the flow path flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S4610, in the subsequent flow path setting process (S1145), it is determined in the process of S4608 that the flow path has already been set to the front route. The process can be terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the incoming ball detection process (S1042) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. This incoming ball detection process (S1041) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 100) of the main controller 110, and as described above, after the big hit starts, the first incoming game ball This is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot based on the type of mouth (time-shortening entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504).

  In the incoming ball detection process (S1042), first, it is determined whether or not the payout flag 203u is on (S4301). If it is determined in the process of S4301 that the payout flag 203u is on (S4301: Yes), it indicates that the game is in a big win and that the lottery of the game state after the big win has been completed. It is determined whether or not it is detected that a game ball has entered the winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (S4303).

  When it is determined in the processing of S4303 that it has been detected that the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has entered the game ball (S4303: Yes) Then, the payout of the prize ball to be given to the player is set (S4304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if no game ball has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (S4303: No), the processing of S4304 is performed. Skip the process and end this process.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the payout flag 203u is not on (that is, it is off) (S4301: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball waiting flag 203r is set to on (S4302). ). If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the incoming ball waiting flag 203r is not on (that is, it is off) (S4302: No), it means that the current time is not a period for drawing lottery after the jackpot. Therefore, this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball waiting flag 203r is on (S4302: Yes), it is determined that a game ball has entered one of the probability variation ball openings (probability variation ball openings 502 to 504). It is determined whether or not it has been detected (S4305), and when it is determined that a game ball has entered, the probability variation flag 203e is turned on to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends (S4306).

  When the processing of S4306 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the entrance into which the game ball has entered is a probability variation entrance 503 (S4307), and if it is determined that it is a probability variation entrance 503 (S4307). : Yes), a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S4309), and the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4307 that the entrance into which the game ball entered is not the probability variation entrance 503 (that is, the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504) (S4307: No), a loop state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4310.

  The loop state command set in the process of S4308 or the normal state command set in the process of S4309 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 100) in the external output process (S1001). As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 switches the aspect of the effect to be executed according to whether the normal state command or the loop state command is received. Specifically, when a loop state command is received, an effect suggesting that the loop state is advantageous to the player is executed. Thereby, it can suppress that a player quits a game without noticing that it is in a loop state.

  In the process of S4310 that is executed after the process of S4308 or S4309 is completed, in order to indicate that the lottery of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is completed, the ball waiting flag 203r is set to OFF and the payout flag 203u Is set to ON (S4310), and this process ends.

  In the process of S4305, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probability variation entrances (probability entry entrances 502 to 504) (S4305: No), then, to the time entry entrance 501 It is determined whether or not it is detected that a game ball has entered (S4311). If it is determined that it has not been detected that a game ball has entered the short-time entrance 501 (S4311: No), then, the end condition of the first round, which is a lottery for the game state after the big hit Whether or not is established is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the round.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4312 that the end condition of the first round is not satisfied (S4312: No), this means that the period of lottery for the gaming state after the jackpot ends will continue, so this processing is continued. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition of the first round is satisfied (S4312: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed without setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in order to shift the gaming state after the jackpot to the low probability state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S4313.

  Here, when one round is completed without entering any of the entrances (time-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504), the state shifts to a special symbol low probability state. The reason for this is to prevent the player from shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol that is advantageous to the player simply by not launching the game ball in the first round. In other words, when a game ball does not enter any of the entrances (time-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504), it is configured to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol. Then, with the game method of launching game balls in the second and subsequent rounds instead of launching game balls until the end of the first round, the award winning ball is acquired in rounds 2 to 8, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued. I can continue. Therefore, in order to prevent the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is installed from suffering disadvantages, any of the entrances (the short entrance entrance 501 and the probable entrance entrances 502 to 504) is provided. However, when a game ball does not enter, it is configured to shift to a low probability state of a special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. In the process of S4311, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the short-time entrance 501 (S4311: Yes), in order to shift the game state after the jackpot to the low probability state of the special symbol, The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4313.

  In the process of S4313, the probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF, and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 100 (S4313). As a result, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to the low probability state, and the normal symbol is in the short-time state for 100 variations.

  When the processing of S4313 is completed, a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S4314). Then, in order to indicate that the lottery of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot has been completed, the ball waiting flag 203r is set to OFF, the payout flag 203u is set to ON (S4315), and this process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to draw the game state after the jackpot by the lottery device 700 in the first round of the jackpot. And it is comprised so that the flow path (front route or back route) where a game ball advances can be switched by switching the setting of the flow path switching valve 731 during one round of jackpot. Furthermore, the switching timing of the flow path switching valve 731 is constant regardless of the jackpot type, and the opening timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is changed according to the jackpot type, so that the game ball It is configured to control the traveling route. Thereby, a game ball can be made to advance to the same flow path (front route or back route) for every jackpot type.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls that can enter the lottery device 700 is unlimited in the first round in which the game state after the jackpot is lottery. That is, all the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 140 are discharged to the outside via the lottery device 700. Thereby, since the structure which restrict | limits the game ball which enters into the lottery apparatus 700 can be abbreviate | omitted, the structure of the lottery apparatus 700 can be simplified.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the entrance distribution unit 740 guides a game ball to each entrance (time-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504). ˜745d are provided on the cover members 744a and 744b side. That is, the passage is provided in a member different from the flow path forming portion 743 in which the sorting rotator 741 is included. This makes it difficult for the vibration when the game ball flows down the guide path to be conducted to the sorting rotator 741, so that the sorting rotator 741 moves in the reverse direction based on the vibration when the game ball flows down. It can suppress turning.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the magnet 807a provided on the sorting rotator 741 and the magnet 747a provided on the cover member 744a repel each other, and the magnet 807b provided on the sorting rotator 741 The magnet 747b provided on the cover member 744b repels each other, thereby preventing the sorting rotating body 741 from swinging to the opposite side due to vibration or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. .

  For example, magnets may be provided at the right end and the left end of the partition portion 801 provided in the sorting rotator 741. Further, in the flow path forming portion 743, the portion that contacts the right end of the partitioning portion 801 when the sorting rotating body 741 swings to the right side, and the left end of the partitioning portion 801 when the sorting rotating body 741 swings to the left side. You may arrange | position a magnet to the part which contacts. In addition, the magnet provided on the sorting rotating body 741 side and the magnet provided on the flow path forming unit 743 side may be in a direction that attracts each other. As a result, in a state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right side or the left side, it can be stably stopped by being attracted to the magnet provided in the flow path forming unit 743. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the sorting rotating body 741 rotates due to the influence of vibration or the like and swings to the opposite side.

  Further, in the flow path forming portion 743, the portion that contacts the right end of the partitioning portion 801 when the sorting rotating body 741 swings to the right side, and the left end of the partitioning portion 801 when the sorting rotating body 741 swings to the left side. A cushioning material may be provided for each of the portions that come into contact with each other. Thereby, the state of the sorting rotator 741 is switched, and the impact when the right end or the left end of the partitioning portion 801 collides with the flow path forming portion 743 can be reduced. Therefore, the malfunction which will be in the state swung to the reverse side of the distribution rotation body 741 by the rebound by collision can be suppressed. Note that a buffer material may be provided in the partition portion 801 of the sorting rotator 741, or the entire partition portion 801 and the flow path forming portion 743 may be configured with the buffer material.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the portion where the sorting rotator 741 and the flow path forming portion 743 are in contact is limited to both end portions of the partition portion 801, but is not limited thereto. For example, the lower part of the ball stopper 804 and the guide passage 745c may be in contact with each other in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right. Similarly, the lower part of the ball repulsion part 803 and the guide passage 745d may be in contact with each other. Further, in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, the lower portion of the ball stopper 805 and the guide passage 745b may be in contact with the ball repelling portion 802 and the guide passage 745a. Thereby, the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portions 802 and 803 and the impact when the game ball is received by the ball stop portions 804 and 805 are conducted to the guide passages 745a to 745d and dispersed. be able to. Therefore, the impact received by the ball repulsion parts 802 and 803 and the ball stoppers 804 and 805 can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball repulsion portions 802, 803, the ball stopper portions 804, 805, and the guide passages 745a to 745d are brought into contact with each other, a cushioning material may be disposed at each contact portion. Thereby, the impact which the ball repulsion part 802,803 and the ball | bowl stop part 804,805 receive can be relieve | moderated more. Moreover, since the impact when the ball repelling parts 802 and 803 and the ball stoppers 804 and 805 collide with the respective guide paths 745a to 745d is absorbed by the cushioning material, it is possible to prevent the sorting rotating body 741 from bouncing back. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the sorting rotating body 741 swings in the opposite direction due to an impact when it collides with each of the guide passages 745a to 745d.

  Further, a convex protrusion is provided below the ball repulsion portions 802 and 803 and the ball stopper portions 804 and 805, and concave depressions are provided in the guide passages 745a to 745b. You may comprise so that a concave hollow may be fitted. That is, in the state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right side, the convex protrusions provided at the lower part of the ball repulsion portion 803 and the ball stopper 804, and the recesses provided at the guide passage 745d and the guide passage 745c, respectively. Convex protrusions provided in the lower part of the ball repulsion part 802 and the ball stopper part 805 in a state in which the shape depression is fitted and the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left side, You may comprise so that the recessed hollow provided in each of the guidance channel | path 745a and the guidance channel | path 745b may fit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the sorting rotator 741 to rotate, so that it is possible to prevent the sorting rotator 741 from being switched to a state of swinging in the reverse direction due to vibration or the like.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b provided on the top surface of the entrance distribution unit 740 are guided to the distribution rotating body 741. However, the flow paths are not limited to this. For example, the shape of the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a to the sorting rotating body 741 may be configured to be “reverse-shaped” in a front view. . With such a configuration, the game ball flows down the flow path in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and falls from the flow path to the sorting rotator 741. That is, when the game ball falls from the flow path to the sorting rotator 741, it falls in a state of being biased in the lower left direction, so in the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right, It is possible to make it difficult to collide with the ball repulsion unit 802. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the sorting rotator 741 rebounds based on the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 802 and switches to the left side.

  Similarly, the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the back route guiding hole 742b to the sorting rotator 741 may be configured to have a "<" shape when viewed from the front. With this configuration, the game ball flows down the channel in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, and falls from the channel to the sorting rotator 741. That is, when the game ball falls from the flow path to the sorting rotator 741, it falls in a state of being biased in the lower right direction, so in the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, Can be made difficult to collide with the ball repulsion part 803. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the sorting rotator 741 rebounds based on an impact when a game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 803 and switches to a state of swinging to the right.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the inner diameter of the near-side flow path 732a for allowing the game ball to flow down to the near-route guide hole 742a of the entrance distribution portion 740 is configured to be the same regardless of the position. Similarly, the inner diameter of the back-side flow path 732b for flowing down to the back route guide hole 742b, the flow path for guiding game balls that have entered the front route guide hole 742a to the sorting rotator 741, and the back The inner diameter of the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the route guide hole 742b to the sorting rotating body 741 is also configured to be the same regardless of the position, but is not limited thereto. For example, each of the flow paths may be tapered. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the positions at which the game balls flow down to be varied, and thus it is possible to suppress a problem that the game balls are removed from the flow path corresponding to the jackpot type.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sorting rotator 741 is fixed in a direction to rotate in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, but is not limited thereto. For example, the direction of rotation toward the front side and the back side (that is, the rotation direction is rotated by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise about a straight line passing through the center of the top surface and the center of the bottom surface of the entrance distribution unit 740) Orientation). This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the traveling direction of the game ball, so that the game ball first enters any of the entrances (the time entry entrance 501 and the probability entry entrance 5023 to 504). It can be difficult to confirm whether the ball has been made. Therefore, since the lottery result by the lottery device 700 is ambiguous, it is possible to continue to hold the expectation for shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol even after the first round is completed.

  Further, the lottery device 700 may be rotated at a constant speed during the big hit. Thereby, the direction in which the player can easily recognize the path of the game ball traveling inside the lottery device 700 (the direction in which the sorting rotator 741 rotates in the left-right direction) and the direction in which the path of the game ball is difficult to recognize ( The direction in which the sorting rotator 741 rotates in the back or forward direction) can be repeated. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, the game ball in which the game ball has entered can be immediately recognized, and until the big hit is over It is possible to realize a different gaming state, that is, a state where the gaming state cannot be clearly recognized.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are provided, and the second specific winning opening (second opening) is provided in the first round. The large opening) 140a is opened and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened in the second to eighth rounds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set at the timing based on the second large opening switching table 202f in all rounds. May be configured to open and close. Moreover, you may comprise so that the flow-path switching valve 731 may be switched at the timing prescribed | regulated to the flow-path switching table 202g in all rounds. Thereby, both the lottery of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and the acquisition of the winning ball during the jackpot can be performed by the second specified winning slot (second large opening) 140a. The large opening 65a can be omitted. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by simplifying the configuration.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot is drawn in the first round of the jackpot is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the game state after the end of jackpot may be drawn using the lottery apparatus 700 in the 8th round which is the last round of jackpot. By performing the lottery in the eighth round, it is possible to delay the timing at which the type of the entrance into which the game ball enters (the short-time entrance 501 or the probable entrance 501 to 504) is determined. Therefore, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for entering the probability changing entrance 502 or the probability changing entrance 504 that is advantageous to the player for a longer time.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is determined based on the setting of the large opening opening flag 203s, but the second specific winning opening (second large opening) A sensor for determining whether the (opening opening) 140a is open or closed may be provided, and the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a may be determined based on the detection result of the sensor. In addition, even when the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is set to be closed, the detection result of the sensor indicates an open state, or the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a. If the detection result of the sensor indicates a closed state in spite of the setting of the opening, the error may be notified. Thereby, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a does not operate normally due to a failure, the repair can be immediately performed based on the notification.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and a route through which the game ball passes is changed by changing the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (or the flow path switching valve 731) according to the jackpot type. It was decided to use the front or back route. On the other hand, the route through which the game balls that have entered the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700) pass may be randomly selected to be the front route or the back route. That is, the jackpot type may be configured so as not to affect the flow path of the game ball flowing down in the lottery device 300 (or in the lottery device 700). As a configuration for randomly distributing the flow paths of the game balls, for example, a known clune means (two-hole croon) having two through holes is used as the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (or the flow path switching valve 731). ) Should be provided instead. When the game ball that has reached the two-hole crune passes through one of the two through-holes of the two-hole crune, the game ball reaches the front side of the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741). If it flows down and passes through the other through-hole, it may be configured to flow down to the back side of the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741). With this configuration, does the game ball flow down to the front side of the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) until the game ball actually passes through one of the through holes of the two-hole crewn? It can be made impossible to determine whether it flows down to the back side. Therefore, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the game ball will pass the route on the near side that is advantageous to the player.

  In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the setting of the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the right. Although it is configured to reset to (front-facing state), each entrance (time-short entrance 501 and probable entrance) is changed without changing the arrangement of the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741). The correspondence relationship between the ball openings 502 to 504) and the state of transition after the jackpot may be changed. That is, based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, when it is determined that the state of the sorting rotating body 341 is a state of swinging to the left side (front-facing state), a game ball enters the time-shortening entrance 501. It changes to the setting which shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and changes to the setting to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends when the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 504. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up by turning on the power, the initial setting can be performed simply by changing the setting of the entrance, so that the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) The rotation motor 264 for returning the position to the initial position can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, if it is detected that the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the left side, It may be configured to notify the store clerk for switching to the state where the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the right. Thereby, the rotation motor 264 for returning the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) to the initial position (a state swung to the right side) can be omitted. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Moreover, it is good also as a game stop state which cannot perform a normal game while alerting | reporting is performed. Here, the game stop state means, for example, a state in which a prize ball is not paid out even if a game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, Even if a game ball enters the mouths 502 to 504, it is not possible to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, or even if the operation handle is operated, the game ball cannot be launched. Point to. In other words, even if the player plays a game, it means that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) cannot receive a benefit due to swinging to the left side.

  As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (or the flow path switching valves) regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off. The state of the valve 731) is set to the initial state. Therefore, when a game ball is thrown into the lottery apparatus 300 (or the lottery apparatus 700) in a state where the distribution rotator 341 (or the distribution rotator 741) is swung to the left side, the distribution rotator 341 (or the distribution rotator 741). ) Is shifted to the right side (see FIGS. 14 and 94). That is, when it is notified that the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the left side when the power is turned on, the store clerk in the hall sends the game balls to the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700). The throwing rotating body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) can be easily switched to a state where it is swung to the right by simply inserting one ball. The game ball thrown in by the store clerk advances through the guide passage 408c (or the guide passage 745c) and enters the probability variation entrance 503, but the game is stopped until the notification is canceled as described above. Transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is suppressed. Therefore, the state of the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) can be reset without changing the state of the gaming machine.

  Further, instead of the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, the rotation of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on based on the type of the first entrance after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It may be configured to determine whether or not the body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) is swung to the left. Specifically, when a game ball first enters the probability variation entrance 503 and the probability variation entrance 504 that can be entered with the distribution rotator 341 (or the distribution rotator 741) swinging to the left. In addition, an error display may be performed. Thereby, not only the rotation motor 264 but also the position detection sensor 263 can be omitted, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, even if the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the left, the game is continued. You may comprise so that it can perform. Thus, if the sorting rotator 341 (or sorting rotator 741) swings to the left when the power is cut off, the sorting rotator 341 (or sorting rotator 741) swings to the left even after the power is turned on. The game can be started for the player as it is. Thus, for example, in a hall where power is turned on to gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on all at the same time when the store is opened, the sorting rotator 341 (or sorting rotator 741) of each pachinko machine 10 is closed during the hall closing time. It is advantageous for the player to confirm the state or to search for the pachinko machine 10 in which the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the left side when the store is opened. That is, since the number of players who play in the hall at the time of opening or closing the store can be increased, the operating rate of the hall can be increased.

  It should be noted that when the ball enters the probability variation ball opening 502 or the probability variation ball opening 504 in the previous jackpot, the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the left side. The state where the body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) swings to the left is basically a high probability state of a special symbol. However, if power is turned off in this state and power recovery is performed with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the special symbol high probability state setting is erased and the special symbol low probability state is entered. Therefore, it is in a special state in which the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the left and a low probability state of a special symbol. You may comprise so that the display effect only for this special state may be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the sorting rotator 341 (or the sorting rotator 741) is swung to the left.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the sorting rotator 341 is arranged on the rectangular floor portion 401, the pair of rectangular passage walls 402, and the floor portion below the shaft 406 in the guide passages 408b and 408c. A pair of inclined portions 403b and 405b extending obliquely from 401 to the floor portion 401, and ball stoppers 403a and 405a provided on the opposite ends of the inclined portions 403b and 405b from the floor portion 401 However, the sorting rotator 341 is not limited to this shape. For example, a windmill shape may be used.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d of the sorting rotator 341 are extended to the downstream side of the shaft 406, and the game flows down the guide passage 408a or the guide passage 408d. Even when the sphere passed through the shaft 406, the sphere was configured to flow down on the floor 401 (see FIG. 12B and FIG. 15B). On the other hand, you may abolish the channel | path downstream from the axis | shaft 406 among the guidance channel | path 408a and the guidance channel | path 408d. Instead of deleting the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 of the sorting rotating body 341, a passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 may be provided on the cover portion 423 side. That is, the downstream side of the shaft 406 of the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d is provided on the right rear side in front view of the cover portion 423 and on the left front side in front view of the cover portion 423. When the sorting rotator 341 swings to the right about the shaft 406, the guiding passage 408a of the sorting rotator 341 and the passage on the right rear side of the cover portion 423 are engaged with each other. A guide passage similar to the guide passage 408a is formed. Further, when the sorting rotator 341 swings to the left about the shaft 406, the guide passage 408d of the sorting rotator 341 and the passage on the left front side of the cover 423 in front view are engaged, and the guidance of the above embodiment is performed. A guide passage similar to the passage 408d is formed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load due to the weight of the game ball on the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a or the guide passage 408d, the distribution is performed. It is possible to reliably prevent the rotating body 341 from rotating due to the weight of the game ball and swinging to the opposite side.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the player is more advantageous for the player when the game ball passes the front route than for the player when the game ball passes the back route, but the rear route is more advantageous than the front route. You may comprise so that it may become. In other words, the short time entrance 501 and the probability variation entrance 503 may be arranged on the rear side of the front view, and the probability variation entrance port 502 and the probability variation entrance 504 may be arranged on the front side of the front view. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of attracting the game ball to the near side with a magnet or the like and causing the game ball to advance to the near route.

  In the fourth embodiment, as an aspect of the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, an effect in which the hero and the enemy fight is executed, and the hero wins the enemy in the display effect during the jackpot game. By doing so, it was suggested that the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of this jackpot, and the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the next jackpot. On the other hand, it is possible to prepare an effect that makes it clear that the hero will win without confirming the result of the battle with the enemy to the end. For example, when shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the current and next jackpot, a palm-sized enemy may appear with a certain probability (for example, 10%). When an enemy whose size is significantly smaller than a normal enemy appears, the player can be convinced that the main character will win when the enemy appears. Also, during the stage of variation that is a big hit in state A, state C or state E, a treasure box containing treasure is found with a certain probability (for example, 10% when winning big hit A) without the hero meeting the enemy You may comprise so that the production to be performed may be performed. Then, in the effect during the jackpot game after the effect of finding the treasure is performed, an effect of bringing the treasure back to the family may be performed. The effect of finding treasures can be made to ensure that the player transitions to a high probability state of a special symbol before and after the next jackpot, before the jackpot game starts. . In this way, by giving the production multiple variations, it is possible not only to expect a high probability state of special symbols to continue, but also to have an expectation that an unusual production will be performed. It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  In the following, in addition to the pachinko machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristic A group> (structure of an accessory for confirming probability change for two times)
Previous to a entrance where a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area where a game ball entering the entrance can enter, and either the first area or the second area Distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball mouth, and based on the game balls entering the first area, the player is more likely than the game balls entering the second area In the gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the first game, the distribution means is in a first state in which game balls can be distributed to the first region, and to the first region or the second region. A variable means capable of changing the game ball to a second state in which the game balls can be distributed, and a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game balls can pass in the first state. And a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which a game ball can pass in the second state. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the variable means changes the sorting means from the first state to the second state, and the game ball passes through the third flow path. In this case, the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the variable means can distribute the game ball to the first area or the second area, and the distribution means can distribute the game ball to the first area or the second area. The state is changed to the second state. In the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. . Here, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, the state of the sorting means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, The state of the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state by the variable means. As a result, if the distribution means is changed to the first state, in the next distribution performed by the distribution means, the game ball will be distributed to the first area and transferred to the special game state. Can be recognized. Therefore, from the time when the allocating means is changed to the first state, until the next time the allocating means performs the distribution, the player is given a sense of security and satisfaction with regard to the transition to the special gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be performed while holding.

  In the gaming machine A1, the third flow path is to allow a passed game ball to enter the first area, and the fourth flow path is to allow the passed game ball to enter the second area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the first area, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the second area, so if the game ball passes through the third flow path, Then, the game ball enters the first area and shifts to the special game state, and the state of the distribution means changes to the first state. Therefore, since it is possible to continuously shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, for a player who has recognized that the gaming ball has shifted to the special gaming state based on passing through the third flow path Thus, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction with the continuous special gaming state can be provided.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the variable means can change the state of the allocating means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the state of the allocating means is varied by the variable means based on the weight of the game ball that passes, the state of the allocating means can be varied by a natural operation by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution means from being changed at an unnatural timing and causing the player to feel distrust with the gaming machine or the hall.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable means includes a variable suppression means that suppresses a change in the state of the allocating means in a state in which no game ball is passing therethrough.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the switching of the state of the allocating means in a state where the game ball is not passing is suppressed by the variable suppressing means, the allocating means is the first at a timing different from the timing when the allocating means is varied by the variable means. It can be suppressed that the state is switched to the second state, causing damage to the player or causing distrust to the gaming machine or the hall.

<Characteristic B group> (Display effect according to the state of the flow path and structure for the twice loop)
Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to win, the display unit for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the effect of the identification information displayed on the display unit The privilege mode executing means for specifying the mode, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player after the identification information indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is displayed, and the privilege game executing means After the game is executed, the game state specifying means for specifying whether the game state to be executed is a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state And a continuation setting means for setting the gaming state specifying means to a continuation state in which the second gaming state is easily specified a plurality of times, and the continuation state by the continuation setting means. If set, the fall setting means for ending the set continuation state and setting the fall state in which the first game state is easily specified by the gaming state specifying means, and the continuation setting means And an effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means based on whether the continuation state is set or whether the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the continuation setting means sets the gaming state specifying means to a continuation state in which it is easy to specify the second gaming state continuously several times. When the gaming state specifying unit is set to the continuing state, the continuing state is ended by the falling setting unit, and the first gaming state is set to the falling state in which the first gaming state is easily specified. Here, the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying unit is changed by the effect mode changing unit based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting unit or the fall state is set by the fall state setting unit. The Thus, the player can determine whether or not the current state is the continuation state only by confirming the presentation mode displayed on the display means, so that the mode indicating the continuation state is displayed as the presentation mode. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second gaming state is easily specified a plurality of times in succession.

  In the gaming machine B1, after the identification information indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is displayed and before the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution unit is ended, the game state specifying unit specifies Suggestion display control means for controlling the display means to display a suggestion effect indicating a state, the suggestion display control means suggesting that the specific result by the gaming state identification means is the second gaming state Display control based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting unit or the fall state is set by the tumbling state setting unit. A gaming machine B2 characterized by specifying a suggestion effect to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the display effect indicating that the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state is displayed on the display means, the indication indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is indicated by the suggestion display control means. After the information is displayed, and before the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game executing means is finished, the display means is controlled so as to display a suggestive effect suggesting the state specified by the gaming state specifying means. Therefore, by displaying the suggestion effect on the display means, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second gaming state is easily identified multiple times in succession. . In addition, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the suggestion effect is displayed on the display means during the bonus game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine B2, the continuation setting means sets the continuation state when the specific result by the gaming state identification means is the second gaming state, the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state, the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means, so that when the continuation state is reached, the second game state is passed. Since it is possible to prevent the first game state from being changed to the first game state after the game state specifying unit first performs the determination after the continuation state, the player continues the first game state. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game before being identified by the game state identifying means first.

  In the gaming machine B3, the suggestion display control means can suggest that the continuation setting means has set the continuation state in the suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the suggestion effect, the suggestion display control means suggests that the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means, so that the player can easily recognize that the continuation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the second gaming state has become a state that is easily specified a plurality of times by being set to the continuous state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

<Characteristic C group> (2 stages of distribution during probability variation lottery)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on whether or not the winning / failing determination unit performs a determination of whether or not to win and the result of the determination of whether or not the winning / failing unit has determined. After the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the bonus game executing means, the gaming state to be executed is the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In the gaming machine having the game state specifying means for specifying which state of the game state, the gaming state specifying means is based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery, A first game state and a second game state are respectively specified, and as the first lottery, a first specific state in which the first game state is more easily specified than the second game state; The first specific state The second specific state is set as the first lottery means for lottering which one of the second specific state in which the second gaming state is likely to be specified is set, and the second lottery. In this case, the gaming machine C1 further includes second lottery means for lottering whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C1, based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are respectively specified by the gaming state specifying means. Then, as the first lottery, a first specific state where the first gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state, and a second state where the second gaming state is more easily specified than the first specific state. Which one of the specific states is set is drawn by the first lottery means. Here, as the second lottery, even when the second specific state is set, the second lottery means determines whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state. Is done. Thereby, in the specification of one game state by the game state specifying means, two lottery opportunities of the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are given. You can feel that you have more opportunities. Moreover, even if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, it is expected that the lottery result for setting the special state by the second lottery means without discouraging the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the state specification by the game state specifying means can be fully enjoyed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second lottery means draws whether or not to set a special state at the next specification by the game state specifying means based on the specification by the gaming state specifying means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the specification by the game state specifying means, the second lottery means determines whether or not to set a special state at the time of specification by the next game state specifying means. Thereby, even if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, if it is lottery to be set to the special state by the second lottery means, the first specification is made by the first lottery means. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player with respect to the fact that the state has been drawn, and it is possible to make the game look forward to being specified in the special state at the time of specification by the next game state specifying means. In addition, if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the second specific state, and the lottery result by the second lottery means indicates the special state, the state advantageous to the player is continued. Since the player can recognize, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming state specifying means is based on the entrance of a game ball into which a game ball can enter and the game ball that has entered the entrance of the game. Based on the first area specified that the gaming state executed after execution of the bonus game is the first gaming state, and the gaming ball entering the entrance enters the bonus A second area that specifies that the gaming state to be executed after the bonus game is executed by the game execution means is the second gaming state, and the first lottery and the second lottery to the entrance A gaming machine C3 that determines whether to guide the game ball to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the game ball that has entered.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball entering the entrance opening entering the first area, the game state executed after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is set to the first game state. It is specified by specifying means. Then, based on the game ball that has entered the entrance opening into the second area, the game state that is executed after the scoring game is executed by the privilege game execution means is set to the second game state. It is specified by specifying means. Here, it is determined by the first lottery and the second lottery whether the game ball is guided to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the game ball that has entered the entrance. Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily determine the result of the lottery by the first lottery and the second lottery only by confirming the flow direction of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine C3, the second lottery means draws whether or not to set a special state based on the distribution of game balls to the first area or the second area. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the distribution to the first area or the second area, whether or not to set a special state is drawn by the second lottery means, so that the player performs the lottery timing performed by the second lottery means The effect is that it can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine C4, the first flow path and the second flow path through which a game ball can pass when in the special state, and the third flow path is restricted when the game ball is in the special state. The second lottery means determines to set the special state when a game ball has passed through the third flow path, and the second flow path. When the game ball passes through the game machine C5, it is determined that the special state is released.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the special state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path. And when it is in a special state, it is restricted that a game ball passes the 3rd passage and the 4th passage. Here, when the game ball passes through the third flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means to set the special state. Further, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is released. Thus, the player can determine that the game ball has passed through the third flow path by simply confirming that the game ball has passed through the third flow path. There is an effect that the player can be allowed to play the game while having a sense of security and satisfaction with the specification in the special state in the next specification by the game state specifying means.

  In the gaming machine C5, the third flow path is to allow a passed game ball to enter the second area, and the fourth flow path is to allow the passed game ball to enter the first area. A gaming machine C6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the second area, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the first area, so that the player passes through the third flow path. By recognizing this, it is possible to recognize that the transition to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and that the next lottery performed by the second lottery means is performed in the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who recognizes that the game ball has passed through the third flow path can be given a great satisfaction and a sense of security with respect to the continuous advantageous state.

<Characteristic D group> (suppresses that two or more game balls enter the sorting means)
Previous to a entrance where a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area where a game ball entering the entrance can enter, and either the first area or the second area A distribution unit that distributes the game balls that have entered the entry ball port, and a switching unit that switches to a ball entry permission state that permits a game ball to enter the ball entrance for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a predetermined condition; And a transition means for making a transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when a game ball has entered the second area based on the game ball having entered the first area. And the allocating means can be varied between a first state where game balls can be distributed to the first area and a second state where game balls can be easily distributed to the second area. Variable game means, and one game ball that has entered the entrance has reached the sorting means. In addition, the gaming machine D1 is provided with a restricting means for restricting a game ball that has entered the entrance after the game ball from reaching the distributing means at least while the entrance is permitted. .

  According to the gaming machine D1, the game balls that have entered the entrance are distributed to either the first area or the second area by the sorting means, and the game balls are delivered to the entrance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The entry is permitted by the switching means for a predetermined period. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first area, the game state is shifted to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has entered the second area. . Further, the variable means changes the distribution means into a first state where the game balls can be distributed to the first area and a second state where the game balls can be easily distributed to the second area. Here, when one game ball that has entered the entrance reaches the distribution means, it is at least that the game ball that has entered the entrance after the game ball reaches the distribution means. While the ball is permitted, it is restricted by the restricting means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that two or more game balls are distributed to the first area or the second area by the distribution means in one distribution by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being distributed to different areas in one distribution and causing a malfunction of the game machine.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a determination unit for determining whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the determination result of the determination unit is a predetermined result, a restriction for releasing the restriction by the restriction unit A gaming machine D2 comprising a release means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, whether or not a lottery condition is satisfied is determined by the determination unit. Then, when the result of the determination by the determination unit is a predetermined result, the restriction by the restriction unit is released by the restriction release unit. Thereby, every time the determination result by the success / failure determination means becomes a predetermined result, the distribution by the distribution means can be performed, so the player can determine the result of the determination by the validity determination means and the distribution by the distribution means. The result can be confirmed separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is provided with a discharging means for discharging the game ball restricted from reaching the sorting means by the limiting means to the outside of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the game ball restricted from reaching the distributing means by the restricting means is discharged out of the game area by the discharging means, the game ball restricted from reaching the distributing means remains in the game area, It is possible to suppress the remaining game ball from being used as it is in the next sorting by the sorting means. As a result, each time the sorting by the sorting means is performed, the player can be made to launch the game ball at the entrance, so that the sorting by the sorting means can be performed at the player's favorite timing. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the variable means distributes the game ball that has entered the entrance by the sorting means to either the first area or the second area. Based on the above, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it can be changed to either the first state or the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the entrance is distributed to either the first area or the second area by the distributing means, the distributing means is changed to the first state and the second state by the variable means. It can be changed to either one of the states. Since the timing for switching the state of the distribution means is determined, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing for switching the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine D4, a variable suppression unit that suppresses the variable unit from changing to one of the first state and the second state when the game ball has not reached the distribution unit. A gaming machine D5 characterized by the provision.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable suppression means suppresses the variable means from changing to one of the first state and the second state when the game ball has not reached the distribution means. As a result, the allocating means switches from the first state to the second state at a timing different from the timing at which the allocating means is varied by the variable means, causing damage to the player, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the distrust.

<Characteristic E group> (switch the flow path at the timing of the attacker)
The entrance where the game ball enters and the state of the entrance are set to the entrance permission state where the game ball is easy to enter and the entrance restriction state where the entrance of the game ball is restricted. A gaming machine that is provided with a bonus game advantageous to a player by being switched to the entrance-permitted state by the entrance entrance setting means based on establishment of a predetermined condition. It is advantageous for the player when a game ball enters compared to a first area where a game ball entering the ball opening can enter and a game ball entering the first area. The second area and the second path through which the game ball that has entered the entrance has traveled are more likely to travel to the first path or the second area than the first flow path. The distribution means for distributing to the flow path, and the state of the distribution means, based on the progress of the bonus game, State setting means for setting at least once each of a first state in which the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and a second state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path; In the bonus game, as the setting contents for setting the state of the entrance by the entrance setting means, the entrance permission state is set when the state setting means sets the first state. Selecting means for selecting one setting content from a plurality of setting contents including at least one setting content and a second setting content in which the entrance permission state is set when the second state is set; A gaming machine E1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine E1, the flow path of the game ball that has entered the entrance is moved to the first flow path or to the second area from the first flow path by the distributing means. It distributes to the 2nd channel which is easy to advance. The state of the distribution means is divided into a first state in which the game balls are distributed to the first flow path by the state setting means and a second state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path based on the progress status of the privilege game. Set at least once. The first setting content in which the entrance permission state is set when the state setting unit sets the first state as the setting content for setting the entrance state by the entrance setting unit in one privilege game. When the second state is set, one setting content is selected by the selection means from a plurality of setting content including at least the second setting content for which the entrance permission state is set.

  As a result, when the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, the game ball that has entered the entrance has progressed to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, the player can play a game by his / her favorite game method. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the selection means is for selecting either the first setting content or the second setting content, the gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, either the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means. The game ball that has entered the mouth can be advanced to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, since the player can play the game with his / her favorite game method, the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy about the game.

  The gaming machine E1 or E2 includes lottery means for lottering whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and the selection means performs the second setting when the lottery by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine E3, which selects contents.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained is drawn by the lottery means, and when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the second setting content is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the entry permission state is set in the first state or the second state. Therefore, according to the lottery content by the lottery means, there is an effect that various playability can be realized according to the ratio at which the entrance permission state is set in the second state.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the first area or the second area, and the game balls that have passed through the second flow path are assigned to the second area. A gaming machine E4 comprising an area distribution means for distributing the game machine to the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the first area or the second area by the area distribution means, Since the game balls that have passed through the two flow paths are distributed to the second area by the area allocating means, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is advantageous for the player simply by checking the flow paths through which the game balls pass. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine E4, the area allocating means distributes the game ball that has passed through the first flow path to the first area, and the game ball that has passed through the first flow path is the first distribution state. Variable means that can be changed to a second distribution state that is distributed to two regions, and a game ball that has passed through the first flow path is allowed to pass in the first distribution state. One passage, a second passage through which the game ball that has passed through the second flow path can pass, and a game ball that has passed through the first flow path when in the second distribution state. A third passage and a fourth passage through which the game ball that has passed through the second flow path can pass, and the variable means is configured such that when the game ball passes through the second passage, The distribution means is varied from the first distribution state to the second distribution state, and the game ball passes through the third passage. When the gaming machine is characterized in that from the second distribution state in which varying the area distributing means to said first sorting condition E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are produced. That is, the gaming machine is divided into a first distribution state in which game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the first area, and a second distribution state in which game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the second area. The state of is variable. In the first distribution state, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path pass through the first passage, and the game balls that have passed through the second flow path pass through the second passage. In the second distribution state, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path pass through the third passage, and the game balls that have passed through the second flow path pass through the fourth passage. When the game ball passes through the second passage, the region distribution means is changed by the variable means from the first distribution state to the second distribution state, and when the game ball passes through the third passage, The area allocating means is changed by the variable means from the allocating state to the first allocating state.

  As a result, if the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state, the game balls are distributed to the second area in the next distribution performed by the area distribution means, which is advantageous for the player. The player can be made aware. Therefore, from the time when the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state until the next distribution by the area distribution means, there is a sense of security and satisfaction with respect to being advantageous to the player. There is an effect that the game can be performed while holding.

  In the gaming machine E5, the first passage is for causing the passed game ball to enter the first region, and the second passage is for allowing the passed game ball to enter the second region. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5, the gaming ball that has passed through the first passage enters the first region, and the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage enters the second region. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the second passage, the game ball enters the second area and becomes advantageous to the player, and the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state. The In the second distribution state, the game balls are distributed to the second region by the region distribution means, so that it is possible for the player to recognize that the player continuously shifts to a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of security and satisfaction with respect to continuous advantageous states.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first flow path is located closer to the front side than the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first flow path is located on the front side of the second flow path, so that the game ball is in the back compared to the case where the game ball travels on the front side. It is advantageous for the player to proceed on the side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally attracted to the near side using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the fraudulent person, so that the fraudulent act can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E7, the first passage is located on the front side of the second passage, and the third passage is located on the front side of the fourth passage. A gaming machine E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first passage is located on the near side with respect to the second passage and the third passage is located on the near side with respect to the fourth passage, even if the first distribution state is in the second distribution state, However, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball passes through the passage located on the back side than the game ball passes through the passage located on the front side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally attracted to the near side using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the fraudulent person, so that the fraudulent act can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the game machine includes an information acquisition unit that periodically acquires elapsed time information corresponding to an elapsed time from the start of the privilege game, and the distribution unit is configured by the information acquisition unit. Based on the acquired elapsed time information, a gaming machine E9 is characterized in that a flow path in which a game ball travels is distributed to either the first flow path or the second flow path. .

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the following effects are produced. That is, the elapsed time information corresponding to the elapsed time from when the privilege game is started is periodically acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means, the flow path in which the game ball travels is distributed to either the first flow path or the second flow path by the distribution means. Thereby, operation | movement of a distribution means can be made the same in every privilege game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful due to variations in the operation of the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine E9, the entrance setting unit sets the entrance state to the entrance permit state based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A gaming machine E10.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E9, based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition unit, the entrance setting unit sets the entrance state to the entrance permission state. Therefore, the setting of the flow path by the distribution means and the setting of the entrance by the entrance setting means can be controlled based on the same elapsed time information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the deviation between the setting of the flow path and the setting of the entrance permission state.

<Characteristic F group> (structure in which an object is difficult to rebound)
Previous to a entrance where a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area where a game ball entering the entrance can enter, and either the first area or the second area Distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball mouth, and based on the game balls entering the first area, the player is more likely than the game balls entering the second area In the gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the first state, the distribution means includes a plurality of flow paths through which game balls can pass and a first state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first region And a variable means capable of changing the game ball to a second state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first area or the second area, and the variable means includes the plurality of flow paths. Of these, the first state and the second state are made variable based on the passage of a game ball through a part of the flow path. Gaming machine F1, which is a shall.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the distribution means can distribute the game balls to the first area and the first area or the second area, which is a state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first area by the variable means. To the second state, which is a normal state. The first state and the second state are changed by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through some of the plurality of flow paths through which the game ball can pass.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a game ball enters the first area in the next distribution based on the state of the distribution means. Therefore, from the time when the allocating means is changed to the first state, until the next time the allocating means performs the distribution, the player is given a sense of security and satisfaction with regard to the transition to the special gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be performed while holding.

  In the gaming machine F1, when the plurality of flow paths are in the first state, the first flow path and the second flow path through which game balls can pass, and in the second state, A third flow path and a fourth flow path through which a ball can pass; and the variable means is configured to start from the first state when a game ball passes through the second flow path. The distribution means is changed to the second state, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine F2 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path in the first state, and the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path in the second state. Is allowed to pass. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the variable means changes the second state. The distribution means is changed from the state to the first state.

  Thereby, the state of the distribution means can be changed according to which of the plurality of flow paths the game ball passes through, and the flow path through which the game ball that reaches the distribution means next time passes. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to predict the area to be sorted next time by the sorting means depending on the state of the sorting means and the flow path through which the game ball passes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, a gaming machine F3 is provided with a variable restraining means for restraining the sorting means from changing when a game ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the variable restraining means restrains the distribution means from changing when the game ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path. It is possible to prevent the hole from being disadvantageous due to the change to the second state despite passing through the first flow path. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by changing to the first state despite the game ball passing through the fourth flow path.

  In the gaming machine F3, the distribution means is swingable, and the first state is a state in which the distribution means swings on the opposite side to the second state. Game machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F3, the first state is a state in which the sorting means is swung to the opposite side to the second state, so that the current state can be easily made to the player. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine F4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entering area provided inside the ball entrance, and the variable suppression means is arranged in the distribution means and the ball entering area. It is composed of magnets installed in directions that repel each other, and is installed at the closest position when the allocating means swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. A gaming machine F5, which is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the entrance area provided in the entrance. The variable suppression means is composed of magnets installed in directions that repel each other in the distribution means and the entrance area, and the distribution means swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. It is installed at the position closest to

  As a result, even if the distribution means swings due to the influence of vibration or the like, it is possible to suppress the state of the distribution means from being switched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution means from being switched from the first state to the second state even though the game ball is not passing through the second flow path, thereby causing a disadvantage to the hall. be able to. In addition, although the game ball does not pass through the third flow path, the state of the sorting means is switched from the second state to the first state, and the player is distrusted to the gaming machine or the hall. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the feeling.

  In the gaming machine F4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entering area provided inside the ball entrance, and the variable suppression means is arranged in the distribution means and the ball entering area. A gaming machine comprising magnets installed in directions that are attracted to each other, wherein the distribution means is installed at a position that is closest to each other in the first state or the second state. F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the entrance area provided in the entrance. The variable suppression means is composed of a magnet installed in a direction that attracts the distribution means and the entrance area, and the distribution means is installed at the closest position in the first state or the second state.

  Thereby, since the distribution means in the 1st state or the 2nd state can be made to rest stably with the attractive force by a magnet, it has the effect that it can control that the distribution means swings by the influence of vibration etc. .

  In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the allocating means is a portion that comes into contact with the inner wall of the entrance area when the first state is changed to the second state, and from the second state to the first state. The game machine F7 is characterized in that the portion that contacts the inner wall of the entrance area is made of a material capable of absorbing an impact when it is variable.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are produced. That is, a portion that comes into contact with the inner wall portion of the entrance area when the first state is changed to the second state, and a portion that comes into contact with the inner wall of the entrance area when the state is changed from the second state to the first state Is made of a material that can absorb shocks.

  As a result, even if the distribution means and the inner wall portion of the ball-entry area contact when the first state is changed to the second state or when the second state is changed to the first state, It is possible to suppress the sorting means from bouncing off due to an impact. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the return to the state before the state of the sorting means is switched due to the rebound even though the state is switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the allocating means is configured so as to be visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, since the sorting means is configured to be visible to the player, the state of the sorting means is the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize which of these states.

  In the gaming machine F8, the distributing means swings to the right or left when viewed from the front.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F8, the sorting means swings to the right or left when viewed from the front, so that the player can easily determine whether the state is the first state or the second state. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the variable means can change the state of the sorting means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the state of the allocating means is varied based on the weight of the passing game ball. Can be varied by natural movement. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution means from being changed at an unnatural timing and causing the player to feel distrust with the gaming machine or the hall.

  A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

<Others>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, whether or not to win a big win based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, whether to shift to the probability variation state, draw separately during the big win Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being a mere work to obtain a lot of balls, and to play a game with a big hit with a sense of expectation for shifting to a probability fluctuation state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is something to plan.

Some of the above-described gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which game balls can pass in a predetermined area where the game balls can enter only when the probability variation state lottery is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state is reached after the jackpot is ended, depending on which route the game balls are distributed to among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-180999)
However, in such gaming machines, it is possible to determine whether to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the current jackpot, or to determine whether to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the next jackpot. There wasn't. As a result, each time the jackpot is won, the player will feel uneasy about whether he or she will miss the probability-variation lottery, and even if he wins the jackpot, the player will not rest. There was a problem.

  This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and the next probability is determined according to the route through which the game ball has passed among a plurality of routes for performing the probability variation state lottery. By configuring the route through which game balls can pass in a lottery in a variable state to be changeable, game balls to a route other than a route that shifts to a probability variable state (route that shifts to a low probability state) It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from feeling uneasy every time a big hit is made.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, when a lottery is made to determine whether or not to shift to the probability variation state after the big hit, the game ball is moved to a route other than the route that shifts to the probability variation state (route that shifts to the low probability state) As it progressed, it had shifted to a low probability state without room for reversal. As a result, the lottery becomes unsatisfactory and the player may not be able to fully enjoy the lottery.

  This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and by performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a probability variation state, a configuration in which a lottery is performed in multiple stages is performed. Even if one lottery result shows an unfavorable result for the player, depending on the result of another lottery, it can be expected to win the probability variation state, and the player can fully enjoy the lottery. It aims to provide a game machine that can be used.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when two or more game balls enter the predetermined lottery area in the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the probability variation state once, the game balls in one lottery However, there is a possibility that the gaming machine malfunctions because it passes through a plurality of routes.

  This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a predetermined area for performing a lottery when performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to a probability variation state using a game ball. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent two or more gaming balls from entering.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, the route along which the game ball that has entered the predetermined area travels changes depending on the angle of entry of the game ball to the predetermined area, vibration, or the like. As a result, there is a possibility that the player may be worried that his / her game method may affect the route along which the game ball travels every time a big hit is made. That is, there is a problem that the player feels uneasy every time the jackpot.

This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the player from feeling uneasy.
<Other 2>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, whether or not to win a big win based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, whether to shift to the probability fluctuation state is to be drawn separately during the jackpot There is. This prevents the jackpot from being a mere task to get a lot of balls and allows the player to play a jackpot game with the expectation of shifting to a probability fluctuation state, improving the player's interest in the game I am trying.
Some of the above-described gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which game balls can pass in a predetermined area where the game balls can enter only when the probability variation state lottery is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a probability variation state occurs after the jackpot is ended, depending on which route the game balls are distributed to among a plurality of routes provided in a predetermined area (for example, Patent Documents). 1: JP-A-2003-180999).
However, in such gaming machines, it is possible to determine whether to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the current jackpot, or to determine whether to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the next jackpot. There wasn't. As a result, each time the jackpot is won, the player will feel uneasy about whether he or she will miss the probability-variation lottery, and even if he wins the jackpot, the player will not rest. There was a problem.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the player from feeling uneasy every time the jackpot. .
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a entrance where a game ball can enter and a first area and a second area where a game ball entering the entrance can enter. And distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entrance into either the first area or the second area, and based on the fact that the game balls have entered the first area, Transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when a game ball enters the second area, the distribution means includes a plurality of flow paths through which the game ball can pass, It is possible to change between a first state in which game balls can be distributed to one area and a second state in which game balls can be distributed to the first area or the second area. Variable means, and the variable means is configured such that a game ball passes through a part of the plurality of flow paths. It is intended to vary the first state and a second state in particular based.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the plurality of flow paths are allowed to pass through the first flow path and the second flow path when the plurality of flow paths are in the first state. A flow path, and a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which a game ball can pass when in the second state; and the variable means includes the second flow path When the game ball passes through the first state, the distribution means is varied from the first state to the second state, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the first state changes from the second state to the first state. The distribution means is changed to a state.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is a game machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein a variable that suppresses the change of the distributing means when a game ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path. Inhibiting means is provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the allocating means is in a state where the game balls can be distributed to the first area by the variable means, and to the first area or the second area. The game ball can be changed to the second state in which the game balls can be distributed. The first state and the second state are changed by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through some of the plurality of flow paths through which the game ball can pass.
Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a game ball enters the first area in the next distribution based on the state of the distribution means. Therefore, between the time when the distribution means is changed to the first state and the time when distribution is performed by the distribution means, the player is given a sense of security with respect to the transition to the special game state. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path in the first state, and the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path in the second state. Is allowed to pass. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the variable means changes the second state. The distribution means is changed from the state to the first state.
Thereby, the state of the distribution means can be changed according to which of the plurality of flow paths the game ball passes through, and the flow path through which the game ball that reaches the distribution means next time passes. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to predict the area to be sorted next time by the sorting means depending on the state of the sorting means and the flow path through which the game ball passes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the distribution means is variable when the game ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path. This is suppressed by the variable suppression means, so that it is possible to prevent the hole from being disadvantageously changed to the second state despite passing through the first flow path. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by changing to the first state despite the game ball passing through the fourth flow path.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
140 Second specific winning entrance (entrance means)
501 Short-time entrance (first area)
502, 503, 504 Probability entrance (second area)
731 Flow path switching valve (distribution means)
732a Front channel (first channel)
732b Back channel (second channel)
745a Guide passage (part of multiple flow paths, fourth flow path)
745b Guide passage (part of multiple flow paths, third flow path)
745c Guide passage (part of multiple flow paths, second flow path)
745d guide passage (part of a plurality of flow paths, first flow path)
747a Magnet (part of variable suppression means)
747b Magnet (part of variable suppression means)
804 Ball stopper (part of variable means)
805 Ball stopper (part of variable means)
806a Rotating body support shaft (part of variable means)
806b Rotating body support shaft (part of variable means)
807a Magnet (part of variable suppression means)
807b Magnet (part of variable suppression means)
S2713 suggestion effect execution means S4606, S4609 distribution state switching means

Claims (2)

A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter,
Variable means that can be varied between a first position at which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first position;
Variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable means;
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game controlled by the variable control means so as to change the variable means to the first position for at least a predetermined period based on establishment of a predetermined specific condition; In a gaming machine equipped with
As the type of the privilege game, the variable means is variably operated in a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern and the first privilege game controlled so as to be variably operated in the first variable pattern. A type determining means for determining one of the second privilege game controlled by
A first area into which a game ball that has entered the entrance means can enter;
A second area that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters, as compared to when the game ball enters the first area;
A flow passage game ball that ball entrance to entering-sphere unit progresses, to the first flow path, or the second to the region game ball travels second passage have easily than a first flow path Sorting means for sorting;
As the state of the distribution means, a first state in which game balls are distributed to the first flow path and a second state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path are defined according to the specific condition. A distribution state switching means for switching according to a predetermined switching pattern set based on establishment;
A suggestion effect suggesting that the game ball that has entered the ball entry means in the special game is likely to be distributed to the second flow path by the distribution means before the special game is started. A suggestion effect execution means capable of being executed , and
The first variable pattern is more difficult than the second variable pattern to allow the game ball to reach the distribution unit while the distribution unit is switched to the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the ball entry means is disposed at a position where a player can visually recognize the ball.

Images